Mazda Automobile 2009 3 4 DOOR User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AWord to Mazda Owners  
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete  
customer satisfaction in mind.  
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual  
carefully and follow its recommendations.  
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is  
necessary, that's the place to go.  
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best  
possible service.  
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure  
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.  
Mazda Motor Corporation  
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN  
Important Notes About This Manual  
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you  
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.  
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at  
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.  
Event Data Recorder  
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to  
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better  
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer  
vehicles.  
Air Conditioning and the Environment  
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to  
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Perchlorate  
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may  
contain Perchlorate MaterialSpecial handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find  
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.  
©2008 Mazda Motor Corporation  
Printed in Japan June 2008(Print1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Use This Manual  
We want to help you get the most driving  
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's  
manual, when read from cover to cover,  
can do that in many ways.  
NOTE  
A NOTE provides information and sometimes  
suggests how to make better use of your  
vehicle.  
The symbol below, located on some parts  
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual  
contains information related to the part.  
Please refer to the manual for a detailed  
explanation.  
Illustrations complement the words of the  
manual to best explain how to enjoy your  
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can  
find out about the features, important  
safety information, and driving under  
various road conditions.  
The symbol below in this manual means  
Do not do thisor Do not let this  
happen.  
Index: A good place to start is the Index,  
an alphabetical listing of all information  
in your manual.  
You'll find several WARNINGs,  
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.  
WARNING  
A WARNING indicates a situation in  
which serious injury or death could  
result if the warning is ignored.  
CAUTION  
A CAUTION indicates a situation in  
which bodily injury or damage to  
your vehicle, or both, could result if  
the caution is ignored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.  
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint  
systems and SRS air bags.  
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment  
of various parts.  
Important information about driving your Mazda.  
Explanation of instruments and controls.  
Interior Comfort  
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio  
system.  
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.  
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.  
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.  
11  
Technical information about your Mazda.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.  
Dashboard and Interior Overview .............................................. 1-2  
Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-4  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Dashboard and Interior Overview  
Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-20  
Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-19  
Power door lock switch ..................................................................................... page 3-10  
1-2  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Front seat ............................................................................................................. page 2-2  
Seat belt ............................................................................................................. page 2-13  
Rear seat .............................................................................................................. page 2-7  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Exterior Overview  
4 Door  
1-4  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Child safety lock ................................................................................................ page 3-11  
Door lock ............................................................................................................. page 3-9  
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-30  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Exterior Overview  
5 Door  
1-6  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Child safety lock ................................................................................................ page 3-11  
Door lock ............................................................................................................. page 3-9  
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-30  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
2
systems and SRS air bags.  
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2  
Front Seats (Manually Operated Seats) ..................................... 2-2  
Front Seats (Electrically Operated Seats) .................................. 2-4  
Rear Seat ................................................................................... 2-7  
Head Restraintsí .................................................................... 2-10  
Seat Warmerí ......................................................................... 2-11  
Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-13  
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt (3-Point Type) ....................... 2-21  
Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-27  
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions ............... 2-42  
Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-46  
How the Air Bags Work .......................................................... 2-48  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Make sure the adjustable components  
of a seat are locked in place:  
Front Seats (Manually  
Operated Seats)  
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that  
are not securely locked are  
dangerous. In a sudden stop or  
collision, the seat or seatback could  
move, causing injury. Make sure the  
adjustable components of the seat  
are locked in place by attempting to  
slide the seat forward and backward  
and rocking the seatback.  
WARNING  
Do not modify or replace the front  
seats:  
Modifying or replacing the front seats  
such as replacing the upholstery or  
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The  
front seats contain air bag  
components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system. Such  
modifications could damage the  
supplemental restraint system and  
result in serious injury. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is  
any need to remove or reinstall the  
front seats.  
qSeat Slide  
WARNING  
Adjust the driver's seat only when the  
vehicle is stopped:  
Adjusting the driver's seat while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The  
driver could lose control of the vehicle  
and have an accident.  
Do not drive with damaged front seats:  
Driving with damaged front seats is  
dangerous. A collision, even one not  
strong enough to inflate the air bags,  
could damage the front seats which  
contain essential air bag  
To move a seat forward or backward, raise  
the lever and slide the seat to the desired  
position and release the lever.  
components. If there was a  
subsequent collision, an air bag may  
not deploy which could lead to  
injuries. Always have an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,  
front seat belt pretensioners and air  
bags after a collision.  
Make sure the lever returns to its original  
position and the seat is locked in place by  
attempting to push it forward and  
backward.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Do not drive with the seatback  
unlocked:  
All of the seatbacks play an  
qSeat Recline  
WARNING  
Do not drive with either front seat  
reclined:  
important role in your protection in a  
vehicle. Leaving the seatback  
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow  
passengers to be ejected or thrown  
around and baggage to strike  
Sitting in a reclined position while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you do not get the full  
protection from seat belts. During  
sudden braking or a collision, you  
can slide under the lap belt and  
suffer serious internal injuries. For  
maximum protection, sit well back  
and upright.  
occupants in a sudden stop or  
collision, resulting in severe injury.  
After adjusting the seatback at any  
time, even when there are no other  
passengers, rock the seatback to  
make sure it is locked in place.  
To change the seatback angle, lean  
forward slightly while raising the lever.  
Then lean back to the desired position and  
release the lever.  
Always sit in the passenger seat  
properly with the seatback upright and  
feet on the floor:  
Your front passenger seat has weight  
sensors, sitting in the front passenger  
seat improperly out of position or  
with the seatback reclined too far  
while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous as it can take off weight  
from the seat bottom and affect the  
weight determination of the front  
passenger sensing system. As a result  
the front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air  
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which  
could result in serious injury. Always  
sit upright against the seatback with  
your feet on the floor.  
Make sure the lever returns to its original  
position and the seatback is locked in  
place by attempting to push it forward and  
backward.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Front Seats (Electrically  
Operated Seats)  
CAUTION  
When returning a rear-reclined  
seatback to its upright position,  
make sure you hold onto the  
seatback with your other hand while  
operating the lever. If the seatback is  
not supported, it will flip forward  
suddenly and could cause injury.  
WARNING  
Do not modify or replace the front  
seats:  
Modifying or replacing the front seats  
such as replacing the upholstery or  
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The  
front seats contain air bag  
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)í  
components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system. Such  
modifications could damage the  
supplemental restraint system and  
result in serious injury. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is  
any need to remove or reinstall the  
front seats.  
By moving the seat lever up or down, the  
driver's seat bottom height can be  
adjusted.  
Up  
Do not drive with damaged front seats:  
Driving with damaged front seats is  
dangerous. A collision, even one not  
strong enough to inflate the air bags,  
could damage the front seats which  
contain essential air bag  
Down  
components. If there was a  
subsequent collision, an air bag may  
not deploy which could lead to  
injuries. Always have an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,  
front seat belt pretensioners and air  
bags after a collision.  
qLumbar Support Adjustment  
(Driver's Seat)í  
Move the lever forwards to adjust the  
lumbar support as required.  
2-4  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
qSeat Recline (Driver's Seat)  
CAUTION  
Ø The seat-bottom power  
adjustment is operated by motors.  
Avoid extended operation because  
excessive use can damage the  
motors.  
Ø To prevent the battery from  
running down, avoid using the  
power adjustment when the  
engine is stopped. The adjuster  
uses a large amount of electrical  
power.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with either front seat  
reclined:  
Sitting in a reclined position while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you do not get the full  
protection from seat belts. During  
sudden braking or a collision, you  
can slide under the lap belt and  
suffer serious internal injuries. For  
maximum protection, sit well back  
and upright.  
Ø Do not use the switch to make  
more than one adjustment at a  
time.  
Always sit in the front passenger seat  
properly with the seatback upright and  
feet on the floor:  
qSeat Slide (Driver's Seat)  
Your front passenger seat has weight  
sensors, sitting in the front passenger  
seat improperly out of position or  
with the seatback reclined too far  
while the vehicle is moving is  
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter  
switch on the outside of the seat to the  
front or back and hold it. Release the  
switch at the desired position.  
dangerous as it can take off weight  
from the seat bottom and affect the  
weight determination of the front  
passenger sensing system. As a result  
the front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air  
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which  
could result in serious injury. Always  
sit upright against the seatback with  
your feet on the floor.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Change the seatback angle by pressing the  
front or rear side of the reclining switch.  
Release the switch at the desired position.  
qLumbar Support Adjustment  
(Driver's Seat)  
Move the lever forwards to adjust the  
lumbar support as required.  
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)  
The seat height can be adjusted by  
moving the switch up or down.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand  
on the folded seatback while the  
vehicle is moving:  
Rear Seat  
WARNING  
Do not stack cargo higher than the  
seatbacks or place articles on the rear  
package tray or on the luggage  
compartment cover:  
Driving with a passenger on the  
folded seatback is dangerous.  
Allowing a child to sit up on the  
folded seatback while the vehicle is  
moving is particularly dangerous. In  
a sudden stop or even a minor  
collision, a child not in a proper seat  
or child-restraint system and seat  
belt could be thrown forward, back  
or even out of the vehicle resulting in  
serious injuries or death. The child in  
the baggage area could be thrown  
into other occupants and cause  
serious injury.  
Stacking luggage or other cargo  
higher than the seatbacks, and  
placing articles on the rear package  
tray or on the luggage compartment  
cover is dangerous. During sudden  
braking or a collision, objects can fly  
around and become projectiles that  
may hit and injure passengers.  
Make sure luggage and cargo is  
secured before driving:  
Never give the car keys to children and  
do not allow them to play in the  
vehicle:  
Not securing cargo while driving is  
dangerous as it could move or be  
crushed during sudden braking or a  
collision and cause injury.  
Playing with the folding rear seats is  
dangerous. The folding rear  
seatbacks cannot be folded down  
from inside the trunk. Once the  
seatbacks are back up, a child in the  
trunk would not be able to get out  
the way they had entered. If you have  
small children, keep the seatbacks  
locked (sedan).  
Make sure the adjustable components  
of a seat are locked in place:  
Adjustable seats that are not securely  
locked are dangerous. In a sudden  
stop or collision, the seat or seatback  
could move, causing injury.  
Do not drive with the seatback  
unlocked:  
All of the seatbacks play an  
important role in your protection in a  
vehicle. Leaving the seatback  
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow  
passengers to be ejected or thrown  
around and baggage to strike  
occupants in a sudden stop or  
collision, resulting in severe injury.  
After returning the seatback at any  
time, even when there are no other  
passengers, rock the seatback to  
make sure it is locked in place.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Always leave your car locked and keep  
the car keys safely away from children:  
Leaving your car unlocked or the  
keys in reach of children is  
qSplit-Folding Rear Seatback  
To fold the seatbacks  
CAUTION  
dangerous. Children who find their  
way into the trunk through an  
unlocked rear seatback or an open  
trunk can become accidentally locked  
in the trunk. This could result in  
death or brain damage from heat  
prostration, particularly in the  
summer. Always lock the doors and  
the trunk, and as an added measure,  
keep the rear seatbacks locked,  
whether you have children in your  
home or not.  
When operating the rear seatback  
knob, make sure you support the  
seatback with your hand. If the  
seatback is not supported with your  
hand, it will flip forward suddenly  
and could cause injury to the finger  
that pushes the rear seatback knob  
down.  
1. Unfasten the lap portion of the center-  
rear seat belt (page 2-21).  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
CAUTION  
Always unfasten the lap portion of  
the belt before folding the rear-left  
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of  
the belt fastened could cause  
damage to the seat belt, buckle and  
seatback.  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed. Children may find these new  
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy  
to play with and could cause the  
power windows or other controls to  
operate, or even make the vehicle  
move.  
2. Position the outboard seat belts to the  
side when folding the seatbacks down.  
3. Support the seatback with your hand.  
4. Push the rear seatback knob down.  
NOTE  
When returning a rear seat to its original  
position, also replace the seat belt to its  
normal position. Verify that the seat belt pulls  
out and retracts.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
To return the seatbacks to the upright  
position  
WARNING  
Always make sure the seat belts are  
fully pulled out from under the  
seatbacks:  
1. Position the outboard seat belts to the  
side.  
A seat belt caught under a seatback  
after the seatback is returned to its  
upright position is dangerous. In a  
collision or sudden stop, the seat belt  
cannot provide adequate protection.  
2. Lift the seatbacks upright.  
3. Make sure the seat belts are fully  
pulled out from under the seatbacks.  
4. Pull on the top of the seatbacks from  
inside the vehicle to make sure they are  
locked.  
When returning the seatback to the  
upright position, make sure there is no  
red indication:  
5. Fasten the center-rear lap/shoulder belt  
and check that all seat belts are routed  
properly for passenger use (page 2-21).  
A rear seatback not fully returned  
and locked in the upright position is  
dangerous. Sudden stops or  
maneuvering could cause a seatback  
to flip forward suddenly resulting in  
injury. If the red indicator is visible on  
the back of the rear seatback knob,  
the seatback is not locked in the  
upright position.  
Locked position  
Unlocked position  
Red indicator  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
qRear Seatback Lock (4 Door)  
Head Restraintsí  
To lock or unlock a seatback, move the  
lever.  
Head restraints are intended to help  
protect you and the passengers from neck  
injury.  
WARNING  
Always drive with the head restraints  
installed when seats are being used  
and make sure they are properly  
adjusted:  
Driving with the head restraints  
adjusted too low or removed is  
dangerous. With no support behind  
your head, your neck could be  
seriously injured in a collision.  
NOTE  
The seatback locks are part of the trunk  
security system (page 3-16).  
Height adjustment  
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the  
desired position.  
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-  
catch release, then push the head restraint  
down.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is  
even with the top of the passenger's ears,  
never the passenger's neck to prevent  
injury.  
qArmrest  
The rear armrest in the center of the rear  
seatback can be used (no occupant in the  
center seat) or placed upright.  
Armrest  
Front seat  
2-10  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Rear seat  
Seat Warmerí  
The front seats are electrically heated. The  
ignition switch must be in the ON  
position.  
Press the switch to turn the seat warmer  
on or off. When the switch is in the ON  
position, the indicator light will come on.  
Removal/Installation  
To remove the head restraint, pull it up  
while pressing the stop-catch.  
To install the head restraint, press the  
uprights into the holes while pressing the  
stop-catch.  
WARNING  
Always drive with the head restraints  
set up when seats are being used and  
make sure they are properly set up:  
Driving with the head restraints not  
set up is dangerous. With no support  
behind your head, your neck could be  
seriously injured in a collision.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
NOTE  
WARNING  
Use the seat warmer when the engine is  
running, and do not continue to use it for a  
long period of time.  
The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be  
adjusted beyond High and Low because the  
seat warmer is controlled by a thermostat.  
Ø Be careful when using the seat  
warmer. The heat from the seat  
warmer may be too hot for some  
people, as indicated below, and  
could cause a low-temperature  
burn.  
Ø
Infants, small babies, elderly  
people, and physically  
challenged people  
People with delicate skin  
People who are excessively  
fatigued  
People who are drunk  
People who have taken sleep-  
inducing medicine such as  
sleeping pills or cold medicine  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø Do not use the seat warmer with  
anything having high moisture-  
retention ability such as a blanket  
or cushion on the seat. The seat  
may be heated excessively and  
cause a low-temperature burn.  
Ø Do not use the seat warmer even  
when taking a short nap in the  
vehicle. The seat may be heated  
excessively and cause a low-  
temperature burn.  
Ø Do not place heavy objects with  
sharp projections on the seat, or  
insert needles or pins into it. This  
could cause the seat to become  
excessively heated and result in  
injury from a minor burn.  
CAUTION  
Do not use organic solvents to clean  
the seat. It may damage the seat  
surface and the heater.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Seat Belt Precautions  
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden  
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.  
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way  
when not in use.  
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an  
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a  
collision.  
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two  
modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.  
While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front  
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make  
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
WARNING  
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:  
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not  
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown  
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same  
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.  
Do not wear twisted seat belts:  
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not  
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,  
which could cause serious injury or death.  
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:  
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt  
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers  
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for  
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant  
properly restrained.  
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:  
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt  
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate  
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt  
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.  
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has  
been expended:  
One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may  
also deploy at the same time. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only  
function once. While it is safer to use a post-crash (a seat belt that was used in an  
accident) than no seat belt at all, using a seat belt with an expended pretensioner or  
load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. If the seat belt pretensioners  
are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase. Expended seat belt  
pretensioners and air bags must be replaced after any collision which caused them  
to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will only limit loads on the chest once in a  
collision and this is another reason to have the front seat belts inspected. Always  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt pretensioners and air bags  
after any collision.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
CAUTION  
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep  
them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to Cleaning the  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing(page 8-64).  
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions  
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.  
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the  
stomach area.  
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your  
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.  
qEmergency Locking Mode  
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the  
retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will  
always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by  
pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable  
movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking  
mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return the belt to the more  
comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level  
area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it  
around you again.  
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it  
out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again  
slowly.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
qAutomatic Locking Mode  
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to  
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,  
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will  
retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child  
restraint (page 2-27).  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Seat Belt (Except Center-  
Rear Position)  
WARNING  
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the  
Seat Belt:  
NOTE  
Improper positioning of the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.  
Always make sure the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is positioned  
across your shoulder and near your  
neck, but never under your arm, on  
your neck, or on your upper arm.  
When using the center-rear seat belt, refer to  
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt(page 2-21).  
qFastening the Seat Belt  
1. Grasp the seat belt tongue.  
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.  
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,  
not on the abdominal area, then adjust  
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly  
against your body.  
Belt  
Tongue  
Take up slack  
Keep low on  
hip bone  
Too high  
3. Insert the seat belt tongue into the seat  
belt buckle until you hear a click  
sound.  
WARNING  
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat  
Belt:  
Tongue  
The lap portion of the seat belt worn  
too high is dangerous. In a collision,  
this would concentrate the impact  
force directly on the abdominal area,  
causing serious injury. Wear the lap  
portion of the belt snugly and as low  
as possible.  
Buckle  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
qUnfastening the Seat Belt  
qFront Shoulder Belt Adjuster  
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.  
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out  
and check for kinks or twists. Then make  
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.  
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt if  
the seat belt touches your neck, or if it  
crosses your arm instead of your shoulder.  
To raise the shoulder belt adjuster, push  
the adjuster up. To lower the shoulder belt  
adjuster, pull the adjuster and slide it  
down. Make sure the adjuster is locked.  
To raise  
To lower  
Button  
NOTE  
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for  
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting  
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the  
Seat Belt:  
Improper positioning of the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.  
Always make sure the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is positioned  
across your shoulder and near your  
neck, but never under your arm, on  
your neck, or on your upper arm.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner  
and Load Limiting Systems  
WARNING  
Wear seat belts only as recommended  
in this owner's manual:  
For optimum protection, the driver and  
front passenger seat belts are equipped  
with pretensioner and load limiting  
systems. For both these systems to work  
properly you must wear the seat belt  
properly.  
Incorrect positioning of the driver and  
front passenger seat belts is  
dangerous. Without proper  
positioning, the pretensioner and  
load limiting systems cannot provide  
adequate protection in an accident  
and this could result in serious injury.  
For more details about wearing seat  
belts, refer to Fastening the seat  
belts(page 2-17).  
Pretensioners:  
In moderate or severe frontal or near-  
frontal accidents, the front air bag and  
pretensioner systems deploy  
simultaneously. The front seat belt  
retractors remove slack quickly as the air  
bags are expanding.  
In addition, the pretensioner system for  
the front passenger, like the front  
passenger air bag, is designed to only  
deploy in accordance with the total seated  
weight on the front passenger seat. Any  
time the air bags and seat belt  
Have your seat belts changed  
immediately if the pretensioner or load  
limiter has been expended:  
One or both front air bags may  
deploy, and the corresponding  
pretensioner(s) may also deploy at  
the same time. Like the air bags, the  
seat belt pretensioners will only  
function once. While it is safer to use  
a post-crash (a seat belt that was  
used in an accident) than no seat belt  
at all, using a seat belt with an  
pretensioners have fired they must be  
replaced. For details, refer to the front  
passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-48).  
expended pretensioner or load limiter  
loaded reduces the safety available to  
you. If the seat belt pretensioners are  
not replaced, the risk of injury in a  
collision will increase. Expended seat  
belt pretensioners and air bags must  
be replaced after any collision which  
caused them to deploy. Additionally,  
the load limiter will only limit loads  
on the chest once in a collision and  
this is another reason to have the  
front seat belts inspected. Always  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
inspect the seat belt pretensioners  
and air bags after any collision.  
Load limiter:  
The load limiting system releases belt  
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce  
belt force on the occupant's chest. While  
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs  
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has  
an automatic mechanical function and can  
activate in any accident mode with  
sufficient occupant movement.  
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,  
the load limiting function must be  
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
after any collision.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Do not modify the components or  
wiring, or use electronic testing devices  
on the pretensioner system:  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Modifying the components or wiring  
of the pretensioner system, including  
the use of electronic testing devices is  
dangerous. You could accidentally  
activate it or make it inoperable  
which would prevent it from  
activating in an accident. The  
occupants or repairers could be  
seriously injured.  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition switch  
is turned to the ON position or after the  
engine is cranked. The warning light turns  
off after a specified period of time.  
Properly dispose of the pretensioner  
system:  
Improper disposal of the pretensioner  
system or a vehicle with non-  
deactivated pretensioners is  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly illuminates or  
does not illuminate at all when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position. If any of these occur, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible. The system may not work in an  
accident.  
dangerous. Unless all safety  
procedures are followed, injury could  
result. Ask an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer how to safely dispose of the  
pretensioner system or how to scrap  
a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.  
NOTE  
l
WARNING  
The pretensioner system will activate in a  
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal  
collision. The pretensioner system for the  
front passenger is designed to only deploy  
in accordance with the total seated weight  
on the front passenger seat. It will not  
activate in most rollovers, side or rear  
impacts.  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
l
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be  
released when the air bags and  
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate  
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on  
occupants, however, those with sensitive  
skin may experience light skin irritation. If  
residue from the deployment of the air bags  
or the front pretensioner system gets on the  
skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as  
possible.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
Center-Rear Position Seat  
Belt (3-Point Type)  
If a malfunction is detected in the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner systems and  
the warning light, a warning beep sound  
will be heard for about 5 seconds every  
minute.  
Before using the center-rear lap/shoulder  
belt make sure tongue (A) and anchor  
buckle (B) are fastened.  
(A)  
(B)  
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
system warning beep sound will continue  
to be heard for approximately 35 minutes.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
qFastening the Seat Belt  
1. Grasp the tongue (C).  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.  
3. Insert the tongue (C) into the buckle  
(D) until you hear a click.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
(A)  
(C)  
(B)  
(D)  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
qUnfastening the Seat Belt  
WARNING  
Fastening the Center-Rear Seat Belt  
with Only One Buckle:  
Depress the button on the buckle. If the  
belt does not fully retract, pull it out and  
check for kinks or twists. Then make sure  
it remains untwisted as it retracts.  
Fastening the center-rear seat belt  
with only one buckle is dangerous. If  
only one pair of seat belt tongue and  
buckle, either tongue (A) and anchor  
buckle (B) or tongue (C) and anchor  
buckle (D), is fastened, the seat belt  
cannot provide full protection. In a  
sudden stop or collision, the user  
could slide under the belt and suffer  
serious injuries. Always make sure  
that both pairs of seat belt tongues  
and buckles are fastened properly.  
Button  
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the  
Seat Belt:  
NOTE  
Improper positioning of the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.  
Always make sure the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is positioned  
across your shoulder and near your  
neck, but never under your arm, on  
your neck, or on your upper arm.  
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for  
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting  
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
qUnfastening the Lap Portion of  
the Seat Belt  
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,  
not on the abdominal area, then adjust  
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly  
against your body.  
Insert a small object such as a key in the  
anchor buckle (B) slot.  
(A)  
(B)  
WARNING  
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat  
Belt:  
The lap portion of the seat belt worn  
too high is dangerous. In a collision,  
this would concentrate the impact  
force directly on the abdominal area,  
causing serious injury. Wear the lap  
portion of the belt snugly and as low  
as possible.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Sedan (Behind head restraint on left  
side)  
CAUTION  
Always unfasten the lap portion of  
the belt before folding the left-rear  
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of  
the belt fastened could cause  
damage to the seat belt, buckle and  
seatback.  
NOTE  
To encourage rear seat passengers to wear  
their seat belts, we suggest leaving the center-  
rear lap position of the belt fastened at all  
times except when folding the rear seat  
forward.  
(C)  
(A)  
Hatchback (Left side of luggage  
compartment)  
qFastening the Lap Portion of the  
Seat Belt  
Grasp tongue (A) and insert it into the  
anchor buckle (B) until you hear a click. It  
is now secure for passenger use.  
NOTE  
(A)  
After returning the left-rear seatback to its  
upright position, fasten the lap portion of the  
belt.  
(C)  
qStowing and pulling out the  
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt  
To pull out the seat belt, slide tongues  
with your finger, and slowly pull out the  
seat belt from the recess.  
The center-rear position seat belt can be  
stowed using the following procedure.  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
Pulling the seat belt all the way out will switch  
it to automatic locking mode. If automatic  
locking mode is not needed, retract the seat  
belt fully to convert it back to emergency  
locking mode.  
When stowing the seat belt, make  
sure the belt is locked securely into  
the recess. If the seat belt is not  
properly stowed, it might get caught  
in the seats and be damaged.  
To stow the seat belt, retract the belt, put  
tongues (A) and (C) together and insert  
them into the recess.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Seat Belt Extender  
WARNING  
Do not use a seat belt extender unless  
it is necessary:  
If your seat belt is not long enough, even  
when fully extended, a seat belt extender  
may be available to you at no charge from  
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This extender will be only for you and for  
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it  
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold  
in the critical moment of a crash.  
When ordering an extender, only order  
one that provides the necessary additional  
length to fasten the seat belt properly.  
Please contact your Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for more information.  
Using a seat belt extender when not  
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt  
will be too long and not fit properly.  
In an accident, the seat belt will not  
provide adequate protection and you  
could be seriously injured. Only use  
the extender when it is required to  
fasten the seat belt properly.  
Do not use an improper extender:  
Using a seat belt extender that is for  
another person or a different vehicle  
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt  
will not provide adequate protection  
and the user could be seriously  
injured in an accident. Only use the  
extender provided for you and for the  
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER  
use the extender in a different vehicle  
or seat. If you sell your Mazda, do  
not leave your seat belt extender in  
the vehicle. It could be used  
accidentally by the new owner of the  
vehicle. After removing the seat belt  
extender, discard it. Never use the  
seat belt extender in any other  
vehicle you may own in the future.  
Do not use an extender that is too  
long:  
Using an extender that is too long is  
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit  
properly. In an accident, the seat belt  
will not provide adequate protection  
and you could be seriously injured.  
Do not use the extender or choose  
one shorter in length if the distance  
between the extender's buckle and  
the center of the user's body is less  
than 15 cm (6 in).  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
NOTE  
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender  
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt  
extender is left connected, the seat belt  
extender might get damaged as it will not  
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can  
easily fall out of the door when not in use and  
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning  
light will not illuminate and function properly.  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
and a beep sound will be heard if the  
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position.  
Conditions of operation  
Condition  
Result  
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light  
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep  
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard  
position.  
for about 6 seconds.  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened while the warning  
light and the beep sound are  
activated.  
The warning light  
turns off and the beep  
sound stops.  
The driver's seat belt is  
The warning light will  
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the  
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be  
position.  
heard.  
qBelt Minder  
NOTE  
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or  
restore the seat belt minder.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Driver seated/Front passenger not  
seated  
Driver seated/Front passenger seated  
The seat belt warning function reminds  
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt  
according to the chart below.  
The belt minder is a supplemental  
warning to the seat belt warning function.  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
ON position, the warning light/beep  
operates to give you further reminders  
according to the chart below.  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 20  
km/h  
(0 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
(Driver)  
Vehicle speed  
Seat belt  
(Passenger)  
Between 0 20  
km/h  
(0 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Indicator  
Beep  
Seat belt  
Indicator  
Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
Placing heavy items on the front  
passenger seat may cause the front  
passenger seat belt warning function to  
operate depending on the weight of the  
item.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
NOTE  
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight  
sensor to function properly, do not place  
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the  
front passenger seat. The sensor may not  
function properly because the additional  
seat cushion could cause sensor  
interference.  
l
When a small child sits on the front  
passenger seat, it is possible that neither  
the warning light nor the warning beep  
operate.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Child Restraint Precautions  
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use  
them.  
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.  
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety  
of children riding in your vehicle.  
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age  
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual  
child-restraint system.  
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,  
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to  
the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the  
child is seated on the center seat.  
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,  
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).  
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air  
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other  
child-restraint systems.  
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the  
front passenger seat weight sensors work as a part of the supplemental restraint system.  
This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front  
passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the front passenger  
seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).  
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front  
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front  
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.  
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be  
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear  
seats which are the best place for children.  
For more details, refer to Front passenger seat weight sensors(page 2-48).  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
WARNING  
Use the correct size child-restraint system:  
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be  
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and  
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.  
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system  
buckled down:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make  
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-  
restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the  
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors  
for LATCH child-restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor.  
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:  
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No  
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a  
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or  
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag  
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be  
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that  
could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even  
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on  
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.  
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently  
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous:  
Vehicles equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors are also equipped with a  
front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-35). Even with the front  
passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat for children,  
seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the  
following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying  
and could result in serious injury or death to the child.  
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the front  
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the child-  
restraint system.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint  
system.  
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.  
Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.  
Ø The seat is washed.  
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.  
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items  
placed behind it.  
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver  
seat.  
Ø Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat, are attached to the front passenger seat.  
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for  
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.  
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle  
with side and curtain air bags:  
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of  
the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along  
both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint  
system is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause  
serious injury or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or  
against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the  
advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional  
side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location  
for children. Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side  
window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:  
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt  
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers  
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for  
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant  
properly restrained.  
CAUTION  
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during  
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your  
child touches them.  
NOTE  
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH  
child-restraint systems in the rear seat. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,  
refer to LATCH Child-Restraint Systems(page 2-37).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
qRear Seat Child-Restraint System  
Installing Child-Restraint  
Systems  
Installation  
Follow these instructions when using a  
child-restraint system, unless you are  
attaching a LATCH-equipped child-  
restraint system to the rear LATCH lower  
anchors. Refer to LATCH Child-  
Restraint Systems(page 2-37).  
Accident statistics reveal that a child is  
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's  
seat is clearly the worst choice for any  
child under 12, and with rear-facing child-  
restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to  
air bags.  
NOTE  
Follow the child-restraint system  
Some child-restraint systems now come  
with tethers and therefore must be  
installed on the seats that take tethers to  
be effective. In your Mazda, tethered  
child-restraint systems can only be  
accommodated in the three positions on  
the rear seat.  
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you  
are not sure whether you have a LATCH  
system or tether, check in the child-restraint  
system manufacturer's instructions and follow  
them accordingly. Depending on the type of  
child-restraint system, it may use LATCH  
system instead of seat belts or if the belt goes  
across the child's chest, may recommend  
against using automatic locking mode.  
Even if your vehicle is equipped with  
front passenger seat weight sensors (page  
2-48), which automatically deactivates the  
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the  
safest place for a child of any age or size.  
1. Make sure the seatback is securely  
latched by pushing it back until it is  
fully locked.  
2. Secure the child-restraint system with  
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.  
See the manufacturer's instructions on  
the child-restraint system for belt  
routing instructions.  
Some child-restraint systems also employ  
specially designed LATCH attachments;  
refer to LATCH Child-Restraint  
Systems(page 2-37).  
WARNING  
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work  
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:  
Installation of a tether equipped  
child-restraint system in the front  
passenger's seat defeats the safety  
design of the system and will result in  
an increased chance of serious injury  
if the child-restraint system goes  
forward without benefit of being  
tethered.  
Place tether equipped child-restraint  
systems where there are tether  
anchors.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
3. To get the retractor into the automatic  
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt  
portion of the seat belt until the entire  
length of the belt is out of the retractor.  
NOTE  
Inspect this function before each use of the  
child-restraint system. You should not be able  
to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor  
while the system is in the automatic locking  
mode. When you remove the child-restraint  
system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return  
the system to emergency locking mode before  
occupants use the seat belts.  
5. If your child-restraint system requires  
the use of a tether strap, refer to the  
manufacturer's instructions to hook and  
tighten the tether strap after raising the  
head restraint (except center position).  
Anchor bracket location (4 Door)  
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly  
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt  
retracts as snugly as possible. A  
clicking noise from the retractor will be  
heard during retraction if the system is  
in the automatic locking mode. If the  
belt does not lock the seat down tight,  
repeat this step.  
Anchor bracket  
Tether strap position (4 Door)  
Tether  
strap  
Anchor bracket  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Anchor bracket location (5 Door  
outboard position)  
Tether strap position (5 Door center  
position)  
Tether  
strap  
Tether strap position (5 Door outboard  
position)  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
Tether strap  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
Forward  
Always route the tether strap between  
the head restraint and the seatback  
(Except center position):  
Routing the tether strap on top of the  
head restraint is dangerous. In a  
collision the tether strap could slide  
off the head restraint and loosen the  
child-restraint system. The child-  
restraint system could move which  
may result in death or injury to the  
child.  
Anchor bracket location (5 Door center  
position)  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
qIf You Must Use the Front Seat  
WARNING  
for Children  
Always move the front passenger seat  
as far back as possible if installing a  
front-facing child-restraint system on it  
is unavoidable:  
If you cannot put all children in the rear  
seat, at least put the smallest children in  
the rear and be sure the largest child up  
front uses the shoulder belt over the  
shoulder.  
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint  
system on the front passenger seat, even  
with a seat weight sensor equipped  
vehicle.  
This seat is also not set up for tethered  
child-restraint systems, put them in one of  
the rear seat positions set up with tether  
anchors.  
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint  
system cannot be secured in the front  
passenger's seat and should be used in the  
rear seat.  
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the  
side window if you have an optional side  
and curtain air bag, it could cause serious  
injuries to an out of position occupant. As  
children more often sleep in cars, it is  
better to put them in the rear seat. If  
installing the child-restraint system on the  
front seat is unavoidable, follow these  
instructions when using a front-facing  
child-restraint system in the front  
passenger's seat.  
As your vehicle has front air bags  
and doubly so if your vehicle has side  
air bags, a front-facing child-  
restraint system should be put on the  
front passenger seat only when it is  
unavoidable.  
Even if the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light  
illuminates, always move the seat as  
far back as possible, because the  
force of a deploying air bag could  
cause serious injury or death to the  
child.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint  
system in the front seat with an air bag  
that could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems  
on the front seat are particularly  
dangerous.  
Even in a moderate collision, the  
child-restraint system can be hit by a  
deploying air bag and moved  
violently backward resulting in  
serious injury or death to the child.  
Even though you may feel assured  
that the front passenger air bag will  
not deploy based on the fact that the  
front passenger air bag deactivation  
indicator light illuminates.  
NOTE  
l
To check if your front seats have side air  
bags:  
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag  
will have a SRS AIRBAGtag on the  
outboard shoulder of the front seats.  
l
To check if your vehicle has curtain air  
bags:  
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air  
bag will have an SRS AIRBAGmarking  
on the window pillars along the roof edge.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean  
over or against the side window of a  
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:  
It is dangerous to allow anyone to  
lean over or against the side window,  
the area of the front passenger seat,  
the front and rear window pillars and  
the roof edge along both sides from  
which the side and curtain air bags  
deploy, even if a child-restraint  
2. Secure the child-restraint system with  
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.  
See the manufacturer's instructions on  
the child-restraint system for belt  
routing instructions.  
3. To get the retractor into the automatic  
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt  
portion of the seat belt until the entire  
length of the belt is out of the retractor.  
system is used. The impact of  
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly  
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt  
retracts as snugly as possible. A  
clicking noise from the retractor will be  
heard during retraction if the system is  
in automatic locking mode. If the belt  
does not lock the seat down tight,  
repeat the previous step and also this  
one.  
inflation from a side or curtain air  
bag could cause serious injury or  
death to an out of position child.  
Furthermore, leaning over or against  
the front door could block the side  
and curtain air bags and eliminate  
the advantages of supplemental  
protection. With the front air bag and  
the additional side air bag that  
comes out of the front seat, the rear  
seat is always a better location for  
children. Take special care not to  
allow a child to lean over or against  
the side window, even if the child is  
seated in a child-restraint system.  
NOTE  
l
Inspect this function before each use of the  
child-restraint system. You should not be  
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the  
retractor while the system is in the  
automatic locking mode. When you remove  
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt  
fully retracts to return the system to  
emergency locking mode before occupants  
use the seat belts.  
qFront Passenger's Seat Child-  
Restraint System Installation  
l
Follow the child-restraint system  
1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.  
manufacturer's instructions carefully.  
Depending on the type of child-restraint  
system, it may not employ seat belts which  
are in automatic locking mode.  
5. Make sure the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light illuminates  
after installing a child-restraint system  
on the front passenger seat.  
Refer to Front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light on page  
2-48.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
With seat warmer  
WARNING  
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint  
system on the front passenger seat if  
the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light does not  
illuminate:  
While it is always better to install any  
child-restraint system on the rear  
seat, it is imperative that a child-  
restraint system ONLY be used on the  
front passenger seat if the  
deactivation indicator light  
illuminates when the child is seated  
in the child-restraint system (page  
2-48). Seating a child in a child-  
restraint system installed on the front  
passenger seat with the front  
Without seat warmer  
passenger air bag deactivation  
indicator light not illuminated is  
dangerous. If this indicator light does  
not illuminate even when the total  
seated weight is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lb), this  
means that the front passenger front  
and side air bags, and seat belt  
pretensioner are ready for  
deployment. If an accident were to  
deploy an air bag, a child in a child-  
restraint system sitting in the front  
passenger seat could be seriously  
injured or killed. If the indicator light  
does not illuminate after seating a  
child in a child-restraint system on  
the front passenger seat, seat a child  
in a child-restraint system on the rear  
seat and consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems  
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed  
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seat. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the  
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems  
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you  
must use it to better assure your child's safety.  
WARNING  
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make  
sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-  
restraint system manufacturer's instructions.  
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:  
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.  
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint  
system attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the  
seat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is  
occupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.  
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow  
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the  
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in  
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or  
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH  
child-restraint systems.  
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-  
restraint system:  
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing  
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the  
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and  
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could  
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or  
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no  
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow  
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Anchor bracket location (4 Door)  
q
Child-Restraint System Installation  
Procedure (Rear Outboard Seats)  
1. Make sure the seatback is securely  
latched by pushing it back until it is  
fully locked.  
2. Expand the area between the seat  
bottom and the seatback slightly to  
verify the locations of the LATCH  
lower anchors.  
Anchor bracket  
Tether strap position (4 Door)  
Tether  
strap  
NOTE  
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors  
indicate the locations of LATCH lower  
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint  
system.  
Anchor bracket  
Anchor bracket location (5 Door)  
3. Secure the child-restraint system using  
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,  
following the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the  
child-restraint to be sure both anchors  
are engaged.  
4. If your child-restraint system came  
equipped with a tether, that means it is  
very important to properly secure the  
tether for child safety. Please carefully  
follow the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions when  
installing tethers.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Tether strap position (5 Door)  
q
Child-Restraint System Installation  
Procedure (Rear Center Seat)  
Tether strap  
The LATCH lower anchors at the center  
of the rear seat are much further apart than  
the sets of LATCH lower anchors for  
child-restraint system installation at other  
seating positions. Child-restraint systems  
with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be  
installed on the center seating position.  
Some LATCH equipped child-restraint  
systems can be placed in the center  
Forward  
position and will reach the nearest  
LATCH lower anchors which are 400 mm  
(15.75 in) apart. LATCH compatible  
child-restraint systems (with attachments  
on belt webbing) can be used at this  
seating position only if the child-restraint  
system manufacturer's instructions state  
that the child-restraint system can be  
installed to LATCH lower anchors that are  
400 mm (15.75 in) apart. Do not attach  
two child-restraint systems to the same  
LATCH lower anchor. If your child-  
restraint system has a tether, it must also  
be used for your child's optimum safety.  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
Always route the tether strap between  
the head restraint and the seatback:  
Routing the tether strap on top of the  
head restraint is dangerous. In a  
collision the tether strap could slide  
off the head restraint and loosen the  
child-restraint system. The child-  
restraint system could move which  
may result in death or injury to the  
child.  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
3. Secure the child-restraint system using  
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,  
following the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions. Pull on the  
child-restraint to be sure both anchors  
are engaged.  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
4. If your child-restraint system came  
equipped with a tether, that means it is  
very important to properly secure the  
tether for child safety. Please carefully  
follow the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions when  
installing tethers.  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
Anchor bracket location (4 Door)  
1. Make sure the seatback is securely  
latched by pushing it back until it is  
fully locked.  
2. Expand the area between the seat  
bottom and the seatback slightly to  
verify the locations of the LATCH  
lower anchors.  
Anchor bracket  
Tether strap position (4 Door)  
Tether  
strap  
Anchor bracket  
NOTE  
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors  
indicate the locations of LATCH lower  
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint  
system.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Anchor bracket location (5 Door)  
Tether strap position (5 Door)  
Tether  
strap  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions  
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. You can  
locate the various air bags by the use of SRS AIRBAGlocation indicators. These  
indicators are visible in the area where the air bags are installed.  
The air bags are installed in the following locations:  
l
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)  
l
The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)  
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)í  
l
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)í  
l
These systems operate independently depending on the type of accident encountered; if  
you have side and curtain air bags, the side and curtain air bags are not likely to deploy on  
both sides in the same accident because a vehicle is not often hit from both sides. The side  
and curtain air bags and the frontal air bag system will not normally deploy during the  
same type of accident unless a combination of frontal and side impacts occur.  
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection  
only in the front seats in certain situations and the rear outside passenger positions only in  
same-side collisions, so seat belts are always important in the following ways:  
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.  
Seat belt usage is necessary to:  
l
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag  
l
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal or side collisions that are not severe enough  
l
to activate the air bags.  
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the  
l
l
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.  
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.  
l
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every  
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint  
system (page 2-27).  
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the  
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions.  
2-42  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
WARNING  
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:  
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.  
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be  
expected to inflate only in the first collision with frontal, near frontal or side forces  
that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.  
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:  
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be  
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. Even if the front  
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the front  
passenger seat as far back as possible. A sleeping child is more likely to lean against  
the door and be hit by the side air bag in a moderate, right-side collision. Whenever  
possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seat with an  
appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and size.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that  
could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even  
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on  
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.  
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently  
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.  
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:  
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands  
or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags  
inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too  
close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The  
front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should  
adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the  
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:  
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them is extremely  
dangerous. The side air bags inflate with great force and speed directly out of the  
outboard side of the front seat and expand along the front door on the side the car is  
hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning  
against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks.  
Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows in the vehicle  
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of  
supplemental protection. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting  
in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air  
bags deploy:  
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing  
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere  
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:  
Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the  
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side  
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added  
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is  
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.  
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front  
seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules  
in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:  
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the  
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof  
edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the  
curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the  
roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting  
the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open  
releasing the gas.  
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,  
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free  
to deploy in the event of a side collision.  
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:  
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components  
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of  
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death  
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front  
seats.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags  
have inflated:  
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags  
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could  
get burned.  
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:  
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,  
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The  
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate  
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.  
Front occupants could be seriously injured.  
Do not modify the suspension:  
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the  
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision  
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious  
injuries.  
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:  
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is  
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make  
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,  
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra  
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda  
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front  
seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the  
bags do not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and front  
passenger seat weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an  
undamaged air bag connection.  
NOTE  
l
When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.  
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries  
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.  
l
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that  
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Supplemental Restraint System Components  
The supplemental restraint systems (SRS) have two basic subsystems:  
l
The air bag system with inflators and air bags.  
The electrical system with crash sensors and diagnostic module.  
l
The air bags are mounted in the following locations:  
l
The steering wheel hub  
l
The front passenger dashboard  
The outboard sides of the front seatbacksí  
l
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sidesí  
l
The air bags are out of sight until activated.  
Driver/Front passenger inflators and air bags  
Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)  
Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-19)  
Front air bag sensor  
Side crash sensorsí  
Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light  
Side and curtain inflators and air bagsí  
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-48)  
Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-48)  
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module  
2-46  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-48)  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Front seats  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
How the Air Bags Work  
qHow the Front Air Bags Work  
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, an  
electrical current is sent to the inflators.  
Gases are produced to inflate the front air bags and after the inflation, the front air bags  
quickly deflate.  
The front air bags will function only once. After that, the front air bags will not work  
again and must be replaced.  
Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can replace the system components.  
The front, dual stage air bags control air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an  
impact of moderate severity the front air bags deploy with lesser energy, whereas during  
more severe impacts, they deploy with more energy. Deployment of the front air bags may  
differ between the driver and the front passenger depending on the driver seat position,  
front passenger weight and front seat belt usage, all of which provide data from each sensor  
to the air bag system.  
The front air bags will deploy only  
in a frontal or frontal offset impact.  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the  
supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor  
determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat  
position to the diagnostic module (SAS unit). The SAS unit is also designed to control the  
deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering  
wheel.  
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a  
possible malfunction (page 2-57).  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Front passenger seat weight sensors  
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the  
supplemental restraint system. (page 2-35). These sensors are located under both of the  
front passenger seat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air  
bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the total seated weight is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs).  
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the  
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt  
pretensioner system when:  
l
There is no passenger in the front passenger seat. (The front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light does not illuminate.)  
The total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66  
l
lbs). (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)  
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner  
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates  
according to the following table.  
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front  
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible  
malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt  
pretensioner system will not deploy.  
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light  
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air  
bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.  
Without seat warmer  
With seat warmer  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
If the front passenger weight sensors are working properly, the indicator light illuminates  
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. After a specified period of time it  
goes out.  
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:  
Front passenger seat  
Total seated weight on the Front passenger air bag Front passenger front and  
belt pretensioner  
front passenger seat  
deactivation indicator light  
side air bags  
Deactivated  
Deactivated  
system  
Empty (Not occupied)*  
OFF  
ON  
Deactivated  
Less than approx. 30 kg  
(66 lbs)  
Deactivated  
Ready  
Approx. 42 kg (93 lbs) or  
more  
OFF  
Ready  
* If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates,  
however this does not indicate a malfunction.  
Curtain air bag is always ready to inflate and is not deactivated like the passenger front and side air bag.  
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and does not illuminate as indicated in the  
above chart, do not allow a child to sit in the front passenger seat; contact the Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
WARNING  
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:  
When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of  
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The front  
passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition  
and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury.  
Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated  
weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) could result in an air bag not deploying under  
the following conditions, for example:  
Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.  
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the  
front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat  
bottom.  
Ø The front passenger seat occupant sits in a manner that does not place the entire  
weight of the occupant on the seat such as by sitting too close to the door,  
grasping the assist grip or the rim of the moonroof and sitting with the seatback  
reclined too far.  
Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.  
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will  
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66  
lbs) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lbs).  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:  
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors  
will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected  
deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner  
system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated  
weight on the front passenger seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately  
30 kg (66 lbs) could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and seat  
belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions,  
for example:  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint  
system.  
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.  
Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with their feet.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.  
Ø The seat is washed.  
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.  
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items  
placed behind it.  
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver  
seat.  
Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.  
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will  
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) and they will reactivate when the weight exceeds  
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs).  
CAUTION  
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the  
sensors in the front seat bottoms:  
Ø
Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on  
them.  
Ø
Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.  
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:  
Ø
Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the  
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.  
If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint  
system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page  
2-35).  
Ø
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
NOTE  
l
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and  
side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.  
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or  
other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior  
changes suddenly.  
l
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.  
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing a  
child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child-restraint system on the rear  
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Driver and front passenger buckle switches  
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are  
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.  
qHow the Side and Curtain Air Bags Workí  
When air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, an  
electrical current is sent to the inflators.  
Gases are produced to inflate the side and curtain air bags and after the inflation, the side  
and curtain air bags quickly deflate. However, the side air bag system for the front  
passenger is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat, however the curtains are not deactivated.  
The side and curtain air bags will function only once. After that, the side and curtain air  
bags will not work again and must be replaced. Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can  
replace the systems.  
The side and curtain air bags will deploy only on the  
side the vehicle receives the force of the impact.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-53  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
qAir Bag Activation/Deactivation  
NOTE  
If the front passenger seat weight sensors detect a total seated weight on the front passenger seat is  
less than approximately 42 kg (93 lb), the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt  
pretensioner may not deploy (page 2-48), but the curtain air bags may deploy.  
l
Front air bag activation  
Frontal impact within about a 30  
degree range from head-on to the  
vehicle.  
The front air bags will inflate if the  
severity of impact is above the designed  
threshold level.  
l
Hitting a solid wall straight on at  
greater than about 22 km/h (14 mph).  
l
Driving into a big hole or hitting the far  
side of a hole.  
l
Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard  
object.  
Limitations to front air bag activation  
Depending on the severity of impact, the  
front air bags may not inflate in the  
following cases:  
l
Landing hard or the vehicle falling.  
l
Impacts involving trees or poles cause  
severe cosmetic damage but may not  
have enough stopping force to activate  
the air bag.  
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
l
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle  
may not provide the stopping force  
necessary for air bag deployment.  
Vehicle roll-over, may deploy the side  
and curtain air bags but not the front air  
bags.  
l
Rear-ending or running under a truck's  
tail gate may not provide the stopping  
force necessary for air bag deployment.  
Side and curtain air bag activationí  
The severity of impact above the designed  
threshold level to one side of the vehicle  
(driver or passenger side areas) will cause  
the side and curtain air bags on that side  
to inflate, but it will not normally deploy  
the front air bags.  
Non-activation of front air bags  
Front air bags will not normally inflate in  
the following cases:  
l
Collision from the rear.  
Limitations to side and curtain air bag  
activationí  
Depending on the severity of impact, the  
side and curtain air bags may not inflate in  
the following cases:  
l
Frontal offset impact may not provide  
enough side impact to deploy the side  
and curtain air bags.  
l
Impact to the side, but it may deploy  
the side and curtain air bags.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-55  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
Side impacts involving trees or poles  
Non-activation of side and curtain air  
bagí  
can cause severe cosmetic damage but  
may not have enough impact force to  
activate the side and curtain air bags.  
The side and curtain air bags will not  
normally inflate in the following cases:  
l
Collision from the rear.  
l
Vehicle roll-over may not provide  
enough side force to deploy the side  
and curtain air bags.  
l
Collision from the front, but it may  
deploy the front air bags.  
l
Side impacts with two-wheeled  
qConstant Monitoring  
vehicles may not provide enough force  
to deploy the side and curtain air bags.  
The following components of the air bag  
systems are monitored by a diagnostic  
system:  
l
SAS unit  
Front air bag sensor  
l
l
Air bag modules  
Side crash sensorsí  
l
l
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner  
system warning light  
Front seat belt pretensioners  
Front passenger air bag deactivation  
l
l
indicator light  
Related wiring  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Front passenger seat weight sensors  
l
l
l
l
Driver and front passenger seat belt  
buckle switches  
2-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
The diagnostic module continuously  
monitors the system's readiness. This  
begins when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position and continues while  
the vehicle is being driven.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
If a malfunction is detected in the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner systems and  
the warning light, a warning beep sound  
will be heard for about 5 seconds every  
minute.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
system warning beep sound will continue  
to be heard for approximately 35 minutes.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition switch  
is turned to the ON position or after the  
engine is cranked. The warning light turns  
off after a specified period of time.  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly illuminates or  
does not illuminate at all when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position. If any of these occur, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible. The system may not work in an  
accident.  
qMaintenance  
WARNING  
The air bag systems do not require regular  
maintenance. But if any of the following  
occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible:  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
l
The air bag system warning light  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
flashes.  
l
The air bag system warning light  
remains illuminated.  
The air bag system warning light does  
l
not illuminate when the ignition switch  
is turned to the ON position.  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
The air bag system warning beep  
WARNING  
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged  
air bag/seat belt pretensioner system  
components:  
sound will be heard.  
The air bags have deployed.  
l
l
Front passenger air bag deactivation  
indicator light does not illuminate  
when the ignition switch is turned to  
the ON position or does not illuminate  
as indicated in the chart. For more  
details about this indicator light and  
this chart, refer to Front passenger  
seat weight sensors(page 2-48).  
Expended or damaged air bag/seat  
belt pretensioner system components  
must be replaced after any collision  
which caused them to deploy or  
damage them. Only a trained  
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully  
evaluate these systems to see that  
they will work in any subsequent  
accident. Driving with an expended  
or damaged air bag or pretensioner  
unit will not afford you the necessary  
protection in the event of any  
subsequent accident which could  
result in serious injury or death.  
Do not remove interior air bag parts:  
Removing any components such as  
the front seats, front dashboard, the  
steering wheel or parts on the front  
and rear window pillars and along  
the roof edge, containing air bag  
parts or sensors is dangerous. These  
parts contain essential air bag  
components. The air bag could  
accidentally activate and cause  
serious injuries. Always have an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer remove  
these parts.  
Dispose of the air bag properly:  
Improper disposal of an air bag or a  
vehicle with live air bags in it can be  
extremely dangerous. Unless all  
safety procedures are followed, injury  
can result. Ask an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer how to safely dispose of an air  
bag or how to scrap an air bag  
equipped vehicle.  
2-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
NOTE  
If it becomes necessary to have the components  
or wiring system for the supplementary  
restraint system modified to accommodate a  
person with certain medical conditions in  
accordance with a certified physician, contact  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to  
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)(page 9-2).  
2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
3
of various parts.  
Doors and Locks ........................................................................... 3-2  
Keys .......................................................................................... 3-2  
Keyless Entry Systemí ............................................................ 3-3  
Door Locks ............................................................................... 3-8  
Power Windowsí ................................................................... 3-18  
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ........................................................... 3-20  
Moonroofí ............................................................................. 3-24  
Security System ........................................................................... 3-26  
Theft-Deterrent Systemí ........................................................ 3-28  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-30  
Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-30  
Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-30  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Type B  
Keys  
WARNING  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed. Children may find these new  
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy  
to play with and could cause the  
power windows or other controls to  
operate, or even make the vehicle  
move.  
Key code number plate  
A code number is stamped on the plate  
attached to the key set; detach this plate  
and store it in a safe place (not in the  
vehicle) for use if you need to make a  
replacement key.  
NOTE  
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-26) for  
information regarding keys and engine  
starting.  
l
Write down the code number and keep it in  
a separate safe and convenient place, but  
not in the vehicle.  
l
(With theft-deterrent system)  
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-28)  
for information regarding keys and the  
prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents  
theft.  
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized  
Mazda Dealer and have your code number  
ready.  
l
Some types of key chains cannot be  
attached to the retractable type key. In this  
case, use the key ring provided with the  
transmitter which has the key code number  
plate attached.  
The keys operate all locks.  
Type A  
Retractable  
type key  
Key code number plate  
Key ring  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Key extend/retract method (Retractable  
type key)  
Keyless Entry Systemí  
This system remotely locks and unlocks  
the doors and the liftgate, and opens the  
trunk lid.  
To extend the key, press the release  
button.  
It can also help you signal for attention.  
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the transmitter,  
do not:  
Ø Drop the transmitter.  
Ø Get the transmitter wet.  
Ø Disassemble the transmitter.  
Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind  
of magnetic field.  
Ø Expose the transmitter to high  
temperatures on places such as  
the dashboard or hood, under  
direct sunlight.  
To retract the key, rotate it into the holder  
while pressing the release button.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
Non-key type  
l
The keyless entry system is designed to  
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the  
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due  
to local conditions.  
Lock button  
Panic button  
l
Unlock button  
The system does not operate when the key is  
in the ignition switch.  
l
Doors and the liftgate can be locked by  
pressing the lock button while any other  
door or the liftgate is open. However, the  
hazard warning lights will not flash and the  
horn will not sound.  
Trunk button  
l
If the transmitter does not operate when  
pressing a button or the operation range  
becomes too small, the battery may be  
dead. To install a new battery, refer to  
Maintenance (page 3-6).  
NOTE  
l
(U.S.A.)  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
l
Additional transmitters can be obtained at  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3  
transmitters can be used with the keyless  
entry system per vehicle. Bring all  
transmitters to an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer when additional transmitters are  
required.  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
qTransmitter  
Integrated key type  
Lock button  
Unlock button  
Panic button  
The operation indicator light flashes when  
the buttons are pressed.  
Lock button  
To lock the doors and the liftgate, press  
the lock button and the hazard warning  
lights will flash once.  
Operation  
indicator light  
Trunk button  
To confirm that all doors and the liftgate  
have been locked, press the lock button  
again within 5 seconds. If they are closed  
and locked, the horn will sound and the  
hazard warning lights will flash once.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
Pressing the transmitter lock button to lock  
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to  
indicate that all doors and the liftgate are  
unlocked.  
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights only flash when the  
theft deterrent system is turned off.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash unless  
the theft deterrent system has been properly  
turned off.  
the doors while any door is open does not  
sound the horn.  
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash once  
to indicate that all doors and the liftgate  
are locked.  
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights only flash when  
the theft deterrent system is armed.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all  
the doors and the liftgate are locked before  
the theft-deterrent system is properly  
armed.  
l
l
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-28.  
NOTE  
Auto re-lock function  
After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors  
and the liftgate will automatically lock if one  
of the doors or the liftgate is not opened within  
about 30 seconds.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-28.  
NOTE  
l
All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked  
when the key is in the ignition switch.  
Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are  
locked visually or audibly by use of the  
double click.  
Trunk button  
l
To open the trunk, press and hold the  
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.  
Panic button  
Unlock button  
If you witness from a distance someone  
attempting to break into or damage your  
vehicle, pressing the panic button will  
activate the vehicle's alarm.  
To unlock the driver's door, press the  
unlock button and the hazard warning  
lights will flash twice.  
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press  
the unlock button again within 5 seconds  
and the hazard warning lights will flash  
twice.  
NOTE  
The panic button will work whether any door  
or the liftgate is open or closed.  
Turning on the alarm  
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or  
more will trigger the alarm for about 2  
minutes and 30 seconds, and the  
following will occur:  
l
The horn sounds intermittently.  
The hazard warning lights flash.  
l
Turning off the alarm  
Press any button on the transmitter.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Replacing the transmitter battery  
Integrated key type  
qTransmitter Maintenance  
CAUTION  
1. Unfold the key (page 3-2).  
Ø Make sure the battery is installed  
with the correct pole facing  
upward. Battery leakage could  
occur if it is not installed correctly.  
Ø When replacing the battery, be  
careful not to bend the electrical  
terminals or get oil on them. Also  
be careful not to get dirt in the  
transmitter as it could be  
damaged.  
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into  
the slot and push the tab to remove the  
key from the transmitter.  
Tab  
Ø There is the danger of explosion if  
the battery is not correctly  
replaced.  
Ø Replace only with the same type  
battery.  
Ø
Integrated key type: CR1620 or  
equivalent  
Non-key type: CR2025 or  
equivalent  
3. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into  
the slot and gently pry open the  
transmitter.  
Ø
Ø Dispose of used batteries  
according to the following  
instructions.  
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus  
terminals of the battery using  
cellophane or equivalent tape.  
Never disassemble.  
Never throw the battery into  
fire and/or water.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Never deform or crush.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
4. Press the portion of the battery  
Non-key type  
indicated by A and remove the battery.  
1. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into  
the slot and gently pry open the  
transmitter.  
Slot  
Back cover  
A
NOTE  
If it is difficult to remove the battery by  
pressing with a finger, use a small flathead  
screwdriver to press out the battery.  
2. Press the portion of the battery  
indicated by A and remove the battery.  
5. Put in the new battery (CR1620 or  
equivalent) with the positive pole (  
facing down.  
)
A
6. Align the front and back covers and  
snap the transmitter shut.  
7. Install the key to the transmitter.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
3. Install a new battery (CR2025 or  
equivalent) into the front portion of the  
Door Locks  
WARNING  
Always take all children and pets with  
you or leave a responsible person with  
them:  
holder with the positive pole (  
)
facing up. Press on the B portion of the  
battery to set the battery.  
Back cover  
Leaving a child or a pet unattended  
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In  
hot weather, temperatures inside a  
vehicle can become high enough to  
cause brain damage or even death.  
B
Front  
cover  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
Front of  
holder  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed.  
4. Align the front and back covers and  
snap the transmitter shut.  
qService  
Keep all doors locked when driving:  
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle  
are dangerous. Passengers can fall  
out if a door is accidentally opened  
and can more easily be thrown out in  
an accident.  
If you have a problem with the keyless  
entry system, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring  
all remaining transmitters to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible for a replacement and to make  
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.  
CAUTION  
Radio equipment like this is governed  
by laws in the United States.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void  
the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Always close all the windows and the  
moonroof, lock the doors and take the  
key with you when leaving your vehicle  
unattended:  
qLocking, Unlocking with  
Transmitterí  
The doors can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-3).  
(Except 4 Door)  
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is  
dangerous as children could lock  
themselves in a hot vehicle, which  
could result in death. Also, a vehicle  
left unlocked becomes an easy target  
for thieves and intruders.  
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-  
Lock Knob  
To lock any door from the inside, push the  
door-lock knob.  
To unlock, pull it out.  
This does not operate the other door  
locks.  
(4 Door)  
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is  
dangerous as children could lock  
themselves in a hot vehicle, or  
become trapped by climbing into the  
trunk, which could result in death.  
Also, a vehicle left unlocked becomes  
an easy target for thieves and  
intruders.  
Lock  
qLocking, Unlocking with Key  
The driver's door can be locked/unlocked  
with the key.  
Turn the key toward the front to unlock,  
toward the back to lock.  
Unlock  
Unlock  
Lock  
NOTE  
If your vehicle is equipped with a front  
passenger door key cylinder, the door can be  
locked/unlocked with the key.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
To lock any door with the door-lock knob  
from the outside, push the door-lock knob  
to the lock position and close the door.  
This does not operate the other door  
locks.  
Locking, unlocking with key  
All doors and the liftgate lock  
automatically when the driver's door is  
locked with the key. All doors and the  
liftgate unlock when the driver's door is  
unlocked and the key is held in the unlock  
position for one second or longer.  
Door-lock knob  
(Lock position)  
Unlock  
Lock  
NOTE  
When locking the doors this way, be careful  
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.  
NOTE  
Holding the key in the unlocked position in the  
driver's door lock for about a second unlocks  
all doors and the liftgate. To unlock only the  
driver's door, insert the key into the driver's  
door lock and turn the key briefly to the unlock  
position and then immediately return it to the  
center position.  
qPower Door Locksí  
Vehicle lock-out prevention  
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature  
prevents you from locking yourself out of  
the vehicle. With the key in the ignition  
switch, all doors and the liftgate will  
automatically unlock if they are locked  
using the power door locks with either  
front door open.  
3-10  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Locking, unlocking with door-lock  
switch  
Liftgate (5 Door)  
All doors and the liftgate lock  
WARNING  
Never allow a person to ride in the  
luggage compartment:  
automatically when LOCK is pressed.  
They all unlock when the unmarked part  
of the door-lock switch is pressed.  
Allowing a person to ride in the  
luggage compartment is dangerous.  
The person in the luggage  
compartment could be seriously  
injured or killed during sudden  
braking or a collision.  
Unlock  
Lock  
Do not drive with the liftgate open:  
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle  
is dangerous. An open liftgate in a  
moving vehicle will cause exhaust  
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This  
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),  
which is colorless, odorless, and  
highly poisonous, and it can cause  
loss of consciousness and death.  
Moreover, an open liftgate could  
cause occupants to fall out in an  
accident.  
qRear Door Child Safety Locks  
These locks are intended to help prevent  
children from accidentally opening the  
rear doors. Use them both whenever a  
child rides in the vehicle.  
qLocking, Unlocking with Keyí  
If you insert the key and turn the child  
safety lock to the lock position before  
closing that door, the door cannot be  
opened from the inside.  
The door can be opened only by lifting  
the outside handle.  
To lock the liftgate with the key, insert the  
key and turn it counterclockwise.  
To unlock the liftgate with the key, insert  
the key and turn it clockwise.  
Lock  
Unlock  
Lock  
Unlock  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by  
inserting the key into the driver's door key  
slot, refer to Power Door Locks (page  
3-10).  
NOTE  
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a  
malfunction in the electrical system and the  
liftgate cannot be unlocked, perform the  
following procedure as an emergency measure  
to unlock it:  
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter  
1. Remove the cap on the interior surface of  
the liftgate with a flathead screwdriver.  
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-3).  
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-  
Cap  
Lock Switch  
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the door-lock switch, refer to  
Power Door Locks (page 3-10).  
qOpening and Closing the Liftgate  
Opening the liftgate  
2. Turn the lever to the right to unlock the  
liftgate.  
Pull the handle and lift up the liftgate.  
Lever  
After performing this emergency measure,  
have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Closing the liftgate  
Use both hands to push the liftgate down  
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.  
Pull up on the liftgate to make sure it is  
securely latched.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Luggage compartment cover strap  
qLuggage Compartment  
The luggage compartment can be  
accessed by opening the liftgate when the  
straps are attached to the sides of the  
liftgate.  
WARNING  
Do not place anything on top of the  
cover:  
Placing luggage or other cargo on  
top of the luggage compartment  
cover is dangerous. During sudden  
braking or a collision, the cargo  
could become a projectile that could  
hit and injure someone. The vehicle  
has a light weight luggage  
Strap  
compartment cover to keep the  
contents of your luggage area out of  
sight; it will not retain heavy objects  
that are not tied down in an accident  
such as a rollover. Tie down all heavy  
objects, whether luggage or cargo,  
using the tie down hooks.  
Luggage compartment cover  
The luggage compartment can be  
accessed by opening the luggage  
compartment cover from the inside of the  
vehicle.  
Make sure luggage and cargo is  
secured before driving:  
Not securing cargo while driving is  
dangerous as it could move or be  
crushed during sudden braking or a  
collision and cause injury.  
Latch  
Latch  
CAUTION  
Make sure the luggage compartment  
cover is firmly secured. If it is not  
firmly secured, it could unexpectedly  
disengage resulting in injury.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Trunk Lid (4 Door)  
CAUTION  
To prevent cargo from shifting while  
driving or during sudden  
deceleration, be careful of the  
following:  
Ø Do not open the luggage  
compartment cover while the  
vehicle is moving.  
Ø Do not overload the luggage  
compartment so that the cover  
cannot be closed.  
Ø Do not allow cargo to interfere  
with the luggage compartment  
cover latch.  
WARNING  
Never allow a person to ride in the  
trunk:  
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk  
is dangerous. In addition, the person  
in the trunk could be seriously  
injured or killed during sudden  
braking or a collision.  
Keep the trunk closed when driving:  
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a  
vehicle through an open trunk is  
dangerous. This gas contains CO  
(carbon monoxide), which is  
This cover can be removed for more  
room. To do this, just unfasten the straps;  
then lift and pull it out.  
colorless, odorless, and highly  
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause  
loss of consciousness and death.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Opening the trunk lid with the key  
q
Opening and Closing the Trunk Lid  
Insert the key into the slot and turn it  
clockwise.  
WARNING  
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat  
backs are latched and do not allow  
children to play inside the vehicle:  
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving  
children in the vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous. Children could open the  
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in  
possible injury or death from heat  
exposure.  
Open  
Always keep the car from being a  
tempting place to play by locking rear  
seats, doors and the trunk, and  
keeping the keys where children can  
not play with them:  
Opening the trunk lid with the remote  
release lever  
Leaving children or animals  
Pull up the release lever next to the  
driver's seat.  
unattended in a parked vehicle is  
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and  
children who lock themselves in cars  
or trunks can die very quickly from  
heat prostration. Do not leave your  
children or pets alone in a car at any  
time. Do not leave the car, the rear  
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.  
CAUTION  
Release lever  
For vehicles equipped with a rear  
spoiler, do not lift the trunk lid by the  
spoiler. Lifting up the trunk lid by the  
rear spoiler could cause damage to  
the rear spoiler and the trunk lid.  
Closing the trunk lid  
Use both hands to push the trunk lid down  
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.  
Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure it is  
secure.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
qTrunk Security  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the trunk open for a long period  
when the engine is not running.  
In some situations you may want to  
prevent the trunk from being opened with  
the remote trunk lid release lever.  
Give your key only to someone you trust.  
To secure the trunk lid, lock the rear  
seatbacks (page 2-10), push the trunk lock  
lever up, and close the trunk.  
To cancel the security feature, insert the  
key into the lock, turn the key clockwise,  
and pull the trunk lock lever down.  
Unlock  
Lock  
Trunk lock lever  
qTrunk Light  
The trunk light is on when the lid is open  
and off when it's closed.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Inside Trunk Release  
Lever (4 Door)  
WARNING  
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat  
backs are latched and do not allow  
children to play inside the vehicle:  
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving  
children in the vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous. Children could open the  
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in  
possible injury or death from heat  
exposure.  
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside  
trunk release handle that provides a means  
of escape for children and adults in the  
event they become locked inside the  
trunk.  
No matter how careful adults might be  
with keys and locking their cars, parents  
should be aware that children may be  
tempted to play around vehicles and use  
the trunk as a hiding place.  
Always keep the car from being a  
tempting place to play by locking rear  
seats, doors and the trunk, and  
keeping the keys where children can  
not play with them:  
Adults are advised to familiarize  
Leaving children or animals  
themselves with the operation and  
location of the inside release handle so  
that all children can be told about it in an  
appropriate way, keeping in mind that  
most vehicles do not have such handles.  
unattended in a parked vehicle is  
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and  
children who lock themselves in cars  
or trunks can die very quickly from  
heat prostration. Do not leave your  
children or pets alone in a car at any  
time. Do not leave the car, the rear  
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qOpening the Trunk Lid from the  
Power Windowsí  
Inside  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position for the power windows to  
operate.  
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the  
direction of the arrow. The lever is made  
of material that will glow for hours in the  
darkness of the trunk following a brief  
exposure to ambient light.  
WARNING  
Make sure the opening is clear before  
closing a window:  
The inside trunk release lever is located  
on the inside of the trunk lid.  
Closing power windows are  
dangerous. A person's hands, head,  
or even neck could be caught by the  
window and result in serious injury  
or even death.  
This warning applies especially to  
children.  
Always lock all passenger power  
windows with the power window lock  
switch on the driver's side while  
children are in the vehicle, and never  
allow children to play with power  
window switches:  
Leaving the power window switches  
unlocked while children are in the  
vehicle is dangerous. Power window  
switches that are not locked with the  
power window lock switch would  
allow children to operate power  
windows unintentionally which could  
result in serious injury if a child's  
hands, head or neck becomes caught  
by the window.  
CAUTION  
To prevent burning out the fuse and  
damaging the power window system,  
do not open or close more than three  
windows at once.  
3-18  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qOperating the Driver's Side  
qOperating the Passenger Power  
Power Window  
Windows  
Manual opening/closing  
The power windows may be operated  
when the power window lock switch on  
the driver's door is in the unlocked  
position.  
To open the window to the desired  
position, lightly hold down the switch.  
To close the window to the desired  
position, lightly pull up the switch.  
The passenger windows may be opened or  
closed by the power window master  
control switches on the driver's door.  
Driver's window  
Close  
Open  
Left rear window  
Front passenger's  
window  
Right rear window  
Auto-opening  
Power window lock switch  
To fully open the window automatically,  
press the switch completely down.  
To open the window to the desired  
position, hold down the switch.  
To close the window to the desired  
position, pull up the switch.  
To stop the window partway, lightly pull  
up the switch and then release it.  
Close  
Open  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qPower Window Lock Switch  
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap  
With the lock switch in the unlocked  
position (button not depressed), all power  
windows on each door can be operated.  
WARNING  
When removing the fuel cap, loosen the  
cap slightly and wait for any hissing to  
stop. Then remove it:  
With the lock switch in the locked  
position (button depressed), only the  
driver's side power window can be  
operated.  
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can  
burn skin and eyes and cause illness  
if ingested. Fuel spray is released  
when there is pressure in the fuel  
tank and the fuel cap is removed too  
quickly.  
Locked position  
Before refueling, stop the engine, and  
always keep sparks and flames away  
from the filler neck:  
Unlocked position  
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be  
ignited by sparks or flames causing  
serious burns and injuries.  
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel  
filler cap or not using a fuel filler cap  
may result in fuel leak, which could  
result in serious burns or death in an  
accident.  
WARNING  
Unless a passenger needs to operate a  
power window, keep the power window  
lock switch in the locked position:  
Unintentional power window  
CAUTION  
Always use only a genuine Mazda  
fuel cap or an approved equivalent,  
available at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in a  
serious malfunction of the fuel and  
emission control systems. It may also  
cause the check engine light in the  
instrument cluster to illuminate.  
operation is dangerous. A person's  
hands, head, or neck could be caught  
by the window and result in serious  
injury.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qFuel-Filler Lid  
qFuel-Filler Cap  
To open, pull up the remote fuel-filler lid  
release.  
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it  
counterclockwise.  
4 Door  
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it  
clockwise until two or more click sounds  
are heard.  
Close  
Remote fuel-filler  
lid release  
Open  
5 Door  
Remote fuel-filler  
lid release  
CAUTION  
Make sure the fuel-filler cap is  
tightened securely. The check engine  
light may illuminate when the cap is  
not tightened securely. If the light  
remains on (even after you have  
tightened the cap securely, driven,  
and restarted the engine several  
times), it may indicate a different  
problem. Contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
2. (Type A)  
Hood  
Insert your hand into the hood opening  
and slide the hood latch to the left and  
lift the hood.  
WARNING  
Always check that the hood is closed  
and securely locked:  
(Type B)  
Insert your hand into the hood opening  
and slide the hood latch to the right and  
lift the hood.  
A hood that is not closed and  
securely locked is dangerous as it  
could fly open while the vehicle is  
moving and block the driver's vision  
which could result in a serious  
accident.  
Type A  
qOpening the Hood  
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the  
release handle to unlock the hood.  
Type B  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded  
area indicated by the arrow.  
qClosing the Hood  
WARNING  
Do not leave items in the engine  
compartment:  
Clip  
Pad  
After you have finished checking or  
doing servicing in the engine  
compartment, do not forget and  
leave items such as tools or rags in  
the engine compartment.  
Tools or other items left in the engine  
compartment could cause engine  
damage or a fire leading to an  
unexpected accident.  
Support rod  
4. Secure the support rod in the stay hole  
indicated by the arrow to hold the hood  
open.  
1. Check under the hood area to make  
certain all filler caps are in place and  
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil  
containers, etc.) have been removed.  
With  
turbocharger  
2. Insert the support rod in its clip while  
holding up the hood. Verify that the  
support rod is secured in the clip before  
closing the hood.  
Without  
turbocharger  
3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
Moonroofí  
Before washing your Mazda, make sure the  
moonroof is completely closed so that water  
does not get inside the cabin area. After  
washing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe the  
water off the moonroof before operating it to  
avoid water penetration which could cause  
rust and water damage to your headliner.  
The moonroof can be opened or closed  
electrically only when the ignition switch  
is in the ON position.  
Slide switch  
qTilt Operation  
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted  
open to provide more ventilation.  
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily  
press the rear of the tilt switch.  
To stop tilting partway, press any part of  
the tilt or slide switch.  
Tilt switch  
WARNING  
To close to the desired position, press the  
front of the tilt or slide switch.  
Do not let passengers stand up or  
extend part of their body through the  
open moonroof while the vehicle is  
moving:  
Extending the head, arms, or other  
parts of the body through the  
moonroof is dangerous. The head or  
arms could hit something while the  
vehicle is moving. This could cause  
serious injury or death.  
Tilt up  
Make sure the opening is clear before  
closing the moonroof:  
Close  
Close  
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The  
hands, head, or even neck of a  
person especially a childcould  
be caught in it as it closes, causing  
serious injury or even death.  
qSlide Operation  
To fully open automatically, momentarily  
press the rear of the slide switch.  
To stop sliding partway, press any part of  
the tilt or slide switch.  
3-24  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
To close to the desired position, press the  
front of the tilt or slide switch.  
qSunshade  
The sunshade can be opened and closed  
by hand.  
The sunshade opens automatically when  
the moonroof is opened, but must be  
closed by hand.  
Open  
Sunshade  
Close  
Close  
q
Power Moonroof Re-set Procedure  
If the battery is disconnected, the  
moonroof may not operate correctly. The  
moonroof will not operate correctly until  
it is re-set.Carry out the following  
procedure to re-set the moonroof and  
resume operation:  
CAUTION  
Ø The sunshade does not tilt. To  
avoid damaging the sunshade, do  
not push up on it.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON  
position.  
Ø Do not close the sunshade while  
the moonroof is opening. Trying to  
force the sunshade closed could  
damage it.  
2. Press the rear of the tilt switch while  
the rear of the moonroof tilts open to  
the fully open position. The moonroof  
then closes a little.  
NOTE  
If the re-set procedure is performed while the  
moonroof is in the slide position (partially  
open) it closes before the rear tilts opens.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
Immobilizer System  
CAUTION  
When starting the engine do not  
allow the following, as the engine  
may not start due to the electronic  
signal from the ignition key not being  
transmitted correctly.  
The immobilizer system allows the engine  
to start only with a key the system  
recognizes.  
If someone attempts to start the engine  
with an unrecognized key, the engine will  
not start, thereby helping to prevent the  
theft of your vehicle.  
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.  
If you have a problem with the  
immobilizer system or the key, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
CAUTION  
Ø Radio equipment like this is  
governed by laws in the United  
States.  
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal  
objects touch the key grip.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could  
void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do  
not:  
Ø Spare keys or keys for other  
vehicles equipped with an  
immobilizer system touch or come  
near the key grip.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.  
Get the key wet.  
Expose the key to any kind of  
magnetic field.  
Ø
Expose the key to high  
temperatures on places such as  
the dashboard or hood, under  
direct sunlight.  
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or  
security passage which touch or  
come near the key.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
qOperation  
l
(U.S.A.)  
Arming  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
The system is armed when the ignition  
switch is turned from the ON to the ACC  
or LOCK position.  
The security indicator light in the  
instrument cluster flashes every two  
seconds until the system is disarmed.  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
Disarming  
l
The keys carry a unique electronic code.  
For this reason, and to assure your safety,  
obtaining a replacement key requires some  
waiting time. They are only available  
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.  
If a key is lost, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of  
your remaining keys and immobilizer  
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.  
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not  
been reset is not possible.  
The system is disarmed when the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON position with  
the correct ignition key.  
The security indicator light illuminates for  
about three seconds and goes out.  
l
l
If the engine does not start with the  
correct ignition key, and the security  
indicator light keeps illuminating or  
flashing, the system may have a  
malfunction. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
Theft-Deterrent Systemí  
l
If the security indicator light illuminates  
and stays on when the ignition switch is  
turned to the ON position, the engine will  
not start.  
If the theft deterrent system detects an  
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which  
could result in the vehicle or its contents  
being stolen, the alarm alerts the  
surrounding area of an abnormality by  
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard  
warning lights.  
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from  
a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could  
interfere with your immobilizer system. If  
you are using the proper key and your  
engine fails to start, check the security  
indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the  
ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more,  
then reinsert it and try starting the engine  
again. If it does not start after 3 or more  
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to Operation on page 3-28.  
NOTE  
l
The theft-deterrent system operates with the  
key or the keyless entry system transmitter.  
l
The system will not function unless it is  
properly armed. To properly secure the  
vehicle, always make sure all windows are  
completely closed and all doors and the  
trunk lid/liftgate are locked before leaving  
the vehicle. Remember to take your key and  
transmitter.  
l
If the security indicator light flashes  
continuously while you are driving, do not  
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you  
shut off the engine while the light is  
flashing you will not be able to restart it.  
l
Since the electronic codes are reset when  
qOperation  
repairing the immobilizer system, the keys  
are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
System triggering conditions  
The horn sounds intermittently and the  
hazard warning lights flash for about 3  
minutes when the system is triggered by  
any one of the following:  
qModification and Add-On  
Equipment  
l
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer  
system's operation if the system has been  
modified or if any add-on equipment has  
been installed.  
Forcing open a door, the hood or the  
trunk lid/liftgate.  
Unlocking a door with the door lock  
l
switch.  
l
Opening a door by operating an inside  
door-lock knob.  
Opening the hood by operating the  
hood release handle.  
Opening the trunk lid by operating the  
CAUTION  
l
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do  
not modify the system or install any  
add-on equipment to the immobilizer  
system or the vehicle.  
l
trunk lid release lever.  
If the system is triggered again, the lights  
and horn will activate until a door or the  
trunk lid is unlocked with the key or with  
the transmitter.  
3-28  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
qTo Stop an Alarm  
If the battery goes dead while the theft-  
deterrent system is armed, the horn will  
activate and the hazard warning lights will  
flash when the battery is charged or replaced.  
A triggered alarm can be turned off by  
any one of the following methods:  
l
Unlock a door or the trunk lid with the  
key.  
l
Press the unlock button on the keyless  
qHow to Arm the System  
entry system transmitter.  
1. Remove the key from the ignition  
switch.  
NOTE  
If you have any problem with the theft-  
deterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
2. Make sure the hood is closed. Close  
and lock all doors and the liftgate/trunk  
lid from the outside using the key. If  
you have the keyless entry system,  
press the lock button on the transmitter.  
qTheft-Deterrent Labels  
The following method will also arm the  
theft-deterrent system:  
Close the hood and the liftgate/trunk  
lid . Press the area on the door-lock  
switch marked LOCKonce. Close all  
doors.  
The hazard warning lights will flash  
once to indicate that the system is  
armed.  
NOTE  
Locking the doors with the inside door-lock  
knob will not arm the system.  
A label indicating that your vehicle is  
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is  
in the glove compartment.  
qTo Turn off an Armed System  
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the  
lower rear corner of a front door window.  
An armed system can be turned off by any  
one of the following methods:  
l
Unlock a door or the trunk lid with the  
key.  
l
Press the unlock button on the keyless  
entry system transmitter.  
Insert the key into the ignition switch  
l
and turn it to the ON position.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
Steering Wheel  
Mirrors  
qOutside Mirrors  
WARNING  
Never adjust the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving:  
Check the mirror angles before driving.  
Mirror type  
Adjusting the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.  
Moving it can very easily cause the  
driver to abruptly turn to the left or  
right. This can lead to loss of control  
or an accident.  
Flat type (driver's side)  
Flat surface mirror.  
Convex type (front passenger side)  
The mirror has single curvature on its  
surface.  
WARNING  
qSteering Wheel Adjustment  
Be sure to look over your shoulder  
before changing lanes:  
To change the angle or length of the  
steering wheel:  
Changing lanes without taking into  
account the actual distance of the  
vehicle in the convex mirror is  
dangerous. You could have a serious  
accident. What you see in the convex  
mirror is closer than it appears.  
1. Stop the vehicle, pull down the lock  
release lever under the steering  
column.  
Lock release lever  
Power mirror  
The ignition switch must be in the ACC  
or ON position.  
To adjust:  
1. Move the selector switch to the left or  
right to choose the left or right side  
mirror.  
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the  
steering column length to the desired  
positions, push the lever up to lock the  
column.  
3. Push the wheel up and down to be  
certain it's locked before driving.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
2. Depress the mirror switch in the  
appropriate direction.  
Folding the mirror  
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is  
flush with the vehicle.  
Selector switch  
Outside mirror  
Mirror switch  
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control  
by moving the selector switch to the  
middle position.  
WARNING  
Always return the outside mirrors to  
the driving position before you start  
driving:  
Manual control mirror  
To adjust, move the mirror's control lever,  
just inside the door.  
Driving with the outside mirrors  
folded in is dangerous. Your rear view  
will be restricted, and you could have  
an accident.  
qRearview Mirror  
Rearview mirror adjustment  
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror  
to center on the scene through the rear  
window.  
Control lever  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
Type A  
Push the lever forward for day driving.  
Pull it back to reduce glare from  
headlights.  
Day/Night lever  
Day  
Night  
Type B  
WARNING  
Do not stack cargo or objects higher  
than the seatbacks:  
Cargo stacked higher than the  
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block  
your view in the rearview mirror,  
which might cause you to hit another  
car when changing lanes.  
Reducing glare from headlights  
Adjust the mirror with the day/night lever  
in the day position.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
4
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions ........................................ 4-2  
Fuel Requirements .................................................................... 4-2  
Before Starting the Engine ........................................................... 4-6  
Driving Tips................................................................................... 4-7  
Break-In Period ......................................................................... 4-7  
Money-Saving Suggestions ...................................................... 4-7  
Hazardous Driving .................................................................... 4-8  
Driving In Flooded Area ......................................................... 4-11  
Overloading ............................................................................ 4-12  
Turbocharger Informationí .................................................... 4-14  
Towing ......................................................................................... 4-15  
Trailer Towing ......................................................................... 4-15  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Fuel Requirements  
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,  
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.  
2.3-liter turbocharger engine  
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.  
Fuel  
Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)  
Premium unleaded fuel  
91 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (96 RON or above)  
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.  
This vehicle is designed for and requires use of premium unleaded fuel. If 91 octane fuel [  
(R+M)/2 method] (96RON) is not available, gasoline as low as 87 octane [ (R+M)/2  
method] (91RON) can be used temporarily for emergency purposes. Use of gasoline lower  
than 91 octane [ (R+M)/2 method] (96RON) can decrease performance during its use.  
Refueling the vehicle with the correct octane fuel a couple of times will restore vehicle  
performance.  
Except 2.3-liter turbocharger engine  
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.  
Fuel  
Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)  
Regular unleaded fuel  
87 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)  
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.  
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system  
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.  
CAUTION  
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.  
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead  
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.  
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10% ethanol  
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this  
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of  
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.  
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those  
specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally  
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your  
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as  
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name Gasohol.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not  
be covered by the Mazda warranty.  
l
Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.  
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.  
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.  
l
l
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Emission Control System  
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of  
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions  
requirements.  
WARNING  
Never park over or near anything flammable:  
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with  
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and  
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.  
CAUTION  
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst  
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will  
damage the converter and cause poor performance.  
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.  
Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.  
Ø Do not coast with the ignition switch turned off.  
Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.  
Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.  
Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments  
must be made by a qualified technician.  
Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.  
NOTE  
Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before  
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification  
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.  
NOTE  
While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the right  
side of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a self-checking  
device and it operates while the engine is off.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)  
WARNING  
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:  
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is  
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness  
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open  
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.  
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:  
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust  
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss  
of consciousness or even death could occur.  
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when  
idling the engine:  
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed  
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which  
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or  
even death could occur.  
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,  
before starting the engine:  
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The  
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.  
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of  
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Before Starting the Engine  
Before Getting In  
After Getting In  
l
l
l
l
Be sure the windows, outside mirrors,  
and outside lights are clean.  
Inspect inflation pressures and  
condition of tires.  
Look under the vehicle for any sign of  
fluid leaks.  
If you plan to back up, make sure  
nothing is in your way.  
Are all doors closed and locked?  
Is the seat adjusted properly?  
Are the inside and outside mirrors  
adjusted?  
Is everyone's seat belt fastened?  
Check all gauges.  
Check all warning lights when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position.  
Release the parking brake and make  
sure the brake warning light goes off.  
l
l
l
l
l
l
NOTE  
l
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid,  
washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be  
inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.  
Always be thoroughly familiar with your  
Mazda.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Break-In Period  
Money-Saving Suggestions  
No special break-in is necessary, but a few  
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600  
miles) may add to the performance,  
economy, and life of your Mazda.  
How you operate your Mazda determines  
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use  
these suggestions to help save money on  
fuel and repairs.  
l
l
Do not race the engine.  
Do not maintain one constant speed,  
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine  
l
runs smoothly, begin driving.  
Avoid fast starts.  
Keep the engine tuned. Follow the  
l
either slow or fast, for a long period of  
time.  
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle  
l
l
maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
perform inspections and servicing.  
or high engine rpm for extended  
periods of time.  
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.  
l
l
Use the air conditioner only when  
l
Avoid full-throttle starts.  
necessary.  
Slow down on rough roads.  
Keep the tires properly inflated.  
Do not carry unnecessary weight.  
l
l
l
l
Do not rest your foot on the brake  
pedal while driving.  
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.  
Keep windows closed at high speeds.  
Slow down when driving in crosswinds  
l
l
l
and headwinds.  
WARNING  
Never stop the engine when going  
down a hill:  
Stopping the engine when going  
down a hill is dangerous. This causes  
the loss of power steering and power  
brake control, and may cause  
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of  
steering or braking control could  
cause an accident.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
l
For more traction in starting on  
slippery surfaces such as ice or packed  
snow, use sand, rock salt, carpeting, or  
other nonslip material under the front  
wheels.  
Hazardous Driving  
WARNING  
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to  
downshift on slippery surfaces:  
Downshifting into lower gear while  
driving on slippery surfaces is  
NOTE  
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.  
dangerous. The sudden change in tire  
speed could cause the tires to skid.  
This could lead to loss of vehicle  
control and an accident.  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for  
safe driving:  
The ABS cannot compensate for  
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive  
speed, tailgating (following another  
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and  
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire  
friction and road contact because of  
water on the road surface). You can  
still have an accident.  
When driving on ice or in water, snow,  
mud, sand, or similar hazards:  
l
Be cautious and allow extra distance  
for braking.  
Avoid sudden braking and sudden  
l
maneuvering.  
If your vehicle is not equipped with  
l
ABS, brake with the pedal by using a  
light up-down motion. Do not hold the  
pedal down constantly.  
If your vehicle is equipped with ABS,  
do not pump the brakes. Continue to  
press down on the brake pedal.  
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System  
(ABS) on page 5-7.  
l
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and  
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front  
wheels.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Floor Mat  
WARNING  
Make sure the floor mats are hooked  
on the retention pins to prevent them  
from bunching up under the foot  
pedals:  
Rocking the Vehicle  
WARNING  
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56  
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow  
anyone to stand behind a wheel when  
pushing the vehicle:  
Using a floor mat that is not secured  
is dangerous as it will interfere with  
the accelerator and brake pedal  
operation, which could result in an  
accident.  
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning  
the wheels at high speed is  
dangerous. The spinning tire could  
overheat and explode. This could  
cause serious injuries.  
Do not install two floor mats, one on  
top of the other, on the driver's side:  
Installing two floor mats, one on top  
of the other, on the driver's side is  
dangerous as the retention pins can  
only keep one floor mat from sliding  
forward.  
CAUTION  
Too much rocking may cause engine  
overheating, transaxle failure, and  
tire damage.  
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from  
snow, sand or mud, depress the  
accelerator slightly and slowly move the  
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.  
In using a heavy duty floor mat for  
winter use always remove the  
original floor mat.  
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with  
the foot pedal and could result in an  
accident.  
When setting a floor mat, position the  
floor mat so that its eyelets and inserted  
over the pointed end of the retention  
posts.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
18-inch tires  
Winter Driving  
Your vehicle is originally equipped with  
summer tires designed for optimum  
traction on wet and dry roads. If your  
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice  
covered roads, Mazda recommends that  
you replace the tires originally equipped  
on your vehicle with snow tires during the  
winter months.  
l
Carry emergency gear, including tire  
chains, window scraper, flares, a small  
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag  
of sand or salt.  
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to  
perform the following precautions:  
l
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in  
the radiator.  
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-21.  
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold  
reduces battery capacity.  
Inspect the ignition system for damage  
and loose connections.  
Use washer fluid made with  
antifreezebut do not use engine  
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid  
(page 8-27).  
WARNING  
Use only the same size and type tires  
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four  
wheels:  
l
l
Using tires different in size or type is  
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling  
could be greatly affected and result  
in an accident.  
l
l
Do not use the parking brake in  
CAUTION  
Check local regulations before using  
studded tires.  
freezing weather as it may freeze.  
Instead, shift to P with an automatic  
transaxle and to 1 or R with a manual  
transaxle. Block the rear wheels.  
NOTE  
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire  
pressure monitoring system, the system may  
not function correctly when using tires with  
steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls (page  
5-31).  
qSnow Tires  
Use snow tires on all four wheels  
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)  
while driving with snow tires. Inflate  
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)  
more than recommended on the tire  
pressure label (driver's door frame), but  
never more than the maximum cold-tire  
pressure shown on the tires.  
Except 18-inch tires  
Your vehicle is originally equipped with  
all season radials designed to be used all  
year around. In some extreme climates  
you may find it necessary to replace them  
with snow tires during the winter months  
to further improve traction on snow and  
ice covered roads.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
qTire Chains  
Driving In Flooded Area  
Check local regulations before using tire  
chains.  
WARNING  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance returns to normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
CAUTION  
Ø Chains may affect handling.  
Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30  
mph) or the chain manufacturer's  
recommended limit, whichever is  
lower.  
Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps,  
holes, and sharp turns.  
Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.  
Ø Do not use chains on a temporary  
spare tire; it may result in damage  
to the vehicle and to the tire.  
Ø Do not use chains on roads that  
are free of snow or ice. The tires  
and chains could be damaged.  
Ø Chains may scratch or chip  
aluminum wheels.  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
CAUTION  
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded  
roads as it could cause short  
circuiting of electrical/electronic  
parts, or engine damage or stalling  
from water absorption. If the vehicle  
has been immersed in water, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire  
pressure monitoring system, the system may  
not function correctly when using tire chains.  
Install the chains on the front tires.  
Do not use chains on the rear tires.  
Use only genuine Mazda tire chains.  
Please consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Installing the chains  
1. Secure the chains on the front tires as  
tightly as possible. Always follow the  
chain manufacturer's instructions.  
2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2  
1 km (1/41/2 mile).  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Overloading  
WARNING  
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:  
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)  
and the gross vehicle weight rating  
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label  
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding  
these ratings can cause an accident  
or vehicle damage. You can estimate  
the weight of your load by weighing  
the items (or people) before putting  
them in the vehicle.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Driving on Uneven Road  
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads  
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on  
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.  
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under  
the following conditions:  
l
Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle  
Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle  
l
Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and  
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be  
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use  
care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Turbocharger Informationí  
The turbocharger greatly enhances engine power. Its advanced design provides improved  
operation and requires minimum additional maintenance. To get maximum performance  
from your turbocharged engine, take note of the following tips:  
l
The turbocharged engine is designed for optimal operation with premium unleaded  
gasoline (page 4-2). Do not use fuel with a lower octane rating. Extra fuel additives are  
NOT recommended.  
Change the engine oil and filter using the turbo engine interval outlined in the  
l
maintenance schedule (for your driving condition).  
Use only the recommended engine oil (page 8-18). Extra oil additives are NOT  
l
recommended.  
l
After driving at freeway speeds or up a long hill, idle the engine at least 30 seconds to  
cool the turbo before turning off the engine. Avoid simply shutting the engine off  
abruptly after a hard or long drive. Damage to the turbocharger may result.  
Do not race or over-rev the engine when starting. This should not be done with ANY  
l
engine, especially not with one that's turbocharged.  
Do not add any aftermarket devices to alter the engine's ignition timing, fuel delivery, or  
l
turbo boost pressure. This may lead to serious engine damage and may void your  
warranty.  
4-14  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Towing  
Trailer Towing  
The Mazda3 is not designed for towing.  
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda3.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
5
Starting and Driving ..................................................................... 5-2  
Ignition Switch .......................................................................... 5-2  
Starting the Engine .................................................................... 5-4  
Brake System ............................................................................ 5-5  
Cruise Controlí ...................................................................... 5-20  
Traction Control System (TCS)í ........................................... 5-23  
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)í ........................................ 5-24  
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí ......................................... 5-27  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds ............................ 5-38  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-54  
Fog Lightsí ............................................................................ 5-55  
Windshield Wipers and Washer .............................................. 5-55  
Rear Window Wiper and Washer (5 Door) ............................. 5-59  
Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-60  
Horn ........................................................................................ 5-61  
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-61  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Automatic transaxle  
Ignition Switch  
To turn the key from the ACC to the  
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in  
the P position.  
qIgnition Switch Positions  
Shift lever  
engaged in P  
(park)  
LOCK  
The steering wheel locks to protect  
against theft. Only in this position can the  
key be removed.  
Manual transaxle  
To turn the key from the ACC to the  
LOCK position, push the button when the  
key is at the ACC position, then turn the  
key to the LOCK position.  
Button  
Push the  
button  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
ON  
WARNING  
This is the normal running position after  
the engine is started. The warning lights  
(except brakes) should be inspected  
before the engine is started (page 5-38).  
Remove the key only when the vehicle  
is parked:  
Removing the key from the ignition  
switch while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. Removing the key allows  
the steering wheel to lock. You will  
lose steering control and a serious  
accident could occur.  
NOTE  
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor  
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This  
does not indicate an abnormality.  
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
put the key to LOCK position, set the  
parking brake and make sure the shift  
lever is in P with an automatic  
transaxle or in 1 or R with a manual  
transaxle:  
START  
The engine is started in this position. It  
will crank until you release the key; then  
it returns to the ON position. The brake  
warning light can be checked after the  
engine is started (page 5-38).  
It is important to place the key in the  
LOCK position even if you are not  
removing the key from the ignition or  
leaving the vehicle. Leaving the key  
in other positions will disable some of  
the vehicle security systems and run  
the battery down.  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
putting the ignition switch in LOCK  
position, setting the parking brake  
and shifting the shift lever to P with  
an automatic transaxle, or to 1 or R  
with a manual transaxle is  
qIgnition Key Reminder  
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or  
ACC position with the key inserted, a  
continuous beep sound will be heard  
when the driver's door is opened.  
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur. This could  
cause an accident.  
NOTE  
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering  
wheel from side to side.  
Leaving the key in any position but LOCK  
position also disables some of the security  
features and may run the battery down.  
ACC (Accessory)  
The steering wheel unlocks and some  
electrical accessories will operate.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Starting the Engine  
CAUTION  
Do not try the starter for more than  
10 seconds at a time. If the engine  
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds  
before trying again. Otherwise, you  
may damage the starter and drain  
the battery.  
NOTE  
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark  
ignition system.  
This system meets all Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Standard requirements  
regulating the impulse electrical field strength  
of radio noise.  
6. After starting the engine, let it idle for  
about 10 seconds.  
1. Occupants should fasten their seat  
belts.  
NOTE  
l
In extremely cold weather or after the  
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.  
3. Depress the brake pedal.  
vehicle has not been driven in several days,  
let the engine warm up without operating  
the accelerator.  
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it  
should be started without use of the  
accelerator.  
4. (Manual transaxle)  
l
Depress the clutch pedal all the way  
and shift into neutral.  
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while  
cranking the engine.  
l
If the engine does not start the first time,  
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under  
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does  
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-16).  
(Automatic transaxle)  
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must  
restart the engine while the vehicle is  
moving, shift into neutral (N).  
NOTE  
(Manual transaxle)  
The starter will not operate unless the clutch is  
depressed sufficiently.  
(Automatic transaxle)  
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is  
not in P or N.  
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START  
position and hold (up to 10 seconds at  
a time) until the engine starts.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Brake System  
WARNING  
Do not coast with the engine stalled or  
turned off, find a safe place to stop:  
Coasting with the engine stalled or  
turned off is dangerous. Braking will  
require more effort, and the brake's  
power-assist could be depleted if you  
pump the brake. This will cause  
longer stopping distances or even an  
accident.  
qFoot Brake  
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes  
that adjust automatically through normal  
use.  
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by  
applying greater force than normal to the  
brake pedal. But the distance required to  
stop will be greater than usual.  
Shift to a lower gear when going down  
steep hills:  
Driving with your foot continuously  
on the brake pedal or steadily  
applying the brakes for long  
distances is dangerous. This causes  
overheated brakes, resulting in  
longer stopping distances or even  
total brake failure. This could cause  
loss of vehicle control and a serious  
accident. Avoid continuous  
application of the brakes.  
Dry brakes that have become wet by  
driving very slowly and applying the  
brakes lightly until brake performance  
is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Setting the parking brake  
qParking Brake  
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly  
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards  
with sufficient force to hold the vehicle in  
a stationary position.  
WARNING  
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
put the key to LOCK position, set the  
parking brake and make sure the shift  
lever is in P with an automatic  
transaxle or in 1 or R with a manual  
transaxle:  
It is important to place the key in the  
LOCK position even if you are not  
removing the key from the ignition or  
leaving the vehicle. Leaving the key  
in other positions will disable some of  
the vehicle security systems and run  
the battery down.  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
putting the ignition switch in LOCK  
position, setting the parking brake  
and shifting the shift lever to P with  
an automatic transaxle, or to 1 or R  
with a manual transaxle is  
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur. This could  
cause an accident.  
Releasing the parking brake  
Depress the brake pedal and pull the  
parking brake lever upwards, then press  
the release button. While holding the  
button, lower the parking brake lever all  
the way down to the released position.  
CAUTION  
Driving with the parking brake on  
will cause excessive wear of the brake  
linings or pads.  
NOTE  
For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving  
(page 4-10) regarding parking brake use.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
qBrake System Warning Light  
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an  
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the  
brake light is no longer illuminated.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the brake system  
warning light illuminated. Contact an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the  
brakes inspected as soon as possible:  
Driving with the brake system  
This warning has the following functions:  
Parking brake warning  
The light illuminates when the parking  
brake is applied with the ignition switch  
in the START or ON position. It turns off  
when the parking brake is fully released.  
warning light illuminated is  
dangerous. It indicates that your  
brakes may not work at all or that  
they could completely fail at any  
time. If this light remains  
Low brake fluid level warning  
If the light stays on after the parking brake  
is fully released, you may have a brake  
problem.  
illuminated, after checking that the  
parking brake is fully released, have  
the brakes inspected immediately.  
qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)í  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way.  
The ABS control unit continuously  
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one  
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by  
automatically releasing and reapplying  
that wheel's brake.  
You may notice that the pedal is harder to  
depress or that it may go closer to the  
floor. In either case, it will take longer to  
stop the vehicle.  
The driver will feel a slight vibration in  
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering  
noise from the brake system. This is  
normal when the ABS operates. Continue  
to depress the brake pedal without  
pumping the brakes.  
1. With the engine stopped, open the  
hood and check the brake fluid level  
immediately, and then add fluid if  
required (page 8-23).  
2. After adding fluid, check the light  
again.  
If the warning light remains on, or if the  
brakes do not operate properly, do not  
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Even if the light turns off have your brake  
system inspected as soon as possible by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
If the ABS warning light stays on while  
you're driving, the ABS control unit has  
detected a system malfunction. If this  
occurs, your brakes will function normally  
as if the vehicle had no ABS.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for  
safe driving:  
The ABS cannot compensate for  
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive  
speed, tailgating (following another  
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and  
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire  
friction and road contact because of  
water on the road surface). You can  
still have an accident.  
Should this happen, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
NOTE  
When the engine is jump-started to charge the  
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS  
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it  
is the result of the weak battery and does not  
indicate an ABS malfunction.  
NOTE  
Recharge the battery.  
l
Braking distances may be longer on loose  
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)  
which usually have a hard foundation. A  
vehicle with a normal braking system may  
require less distance to stop under these  
conditions because the tires will build up a  
wedge of surface layer when the wheels  
skid.  
qElectronic Brake Force  
Distribution System Warningí  
l
The sound of the ABS operating may be  
heard when starting the engine or  
immediately after starting the vehicle.  
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.  
If the electronic brake force distribution  
control unit determines that some  
components are operating incorrectly, the  
control unit may illuminate the brake  
system warning light and the ABS  
warning light on simultaneously. The  
problem is likely to be the electronic  
brake force distribution system.  
qABS Warning Lightí  
The warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
5-8  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Manual Transaxle Operation  
WARNING  
Do not drive with both the ABS warning  
light and brake warning light  
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the brakes inspected as soon as  
possible:  
qManual Transaxle Shift Pattern  
5-speed transaxle  
Driving when the brake system  
warning light and ABS warning light  
are illuminated simultaneously is  
dangerous.  
Neutral position  
6-speed transaxle  
When both lights are illuminated, the  
rear wheels could lock more quickly  
in an emergency stop than under  
normal circumstances.  
Neutral position  
The vehicle is equipped with either a 5-  
speed or 6-speed manual transaxle. The  
shift pattern for each is shown above.  
qBrake Assistí  
During emergency braking situations  
when it is necessary to depress the brake  
pedal with greater force, the brake assist  
system provides braking assistance, thus  
enhancing braking performance.  
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down  
while shifting; then release it slowly.  
(5-speed transaxle)  
A safety feature prevents accidental  
shifting from 5 to R (reverse). The shift  
lever must be put in neutral before being  
shifted to R.  
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply  
more firmly.  
NOTE  
l
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, the pedal will feel  
softer but the brakes will apply more firmly.  
This is a normal effect of the brake assist  
operation and does not indicate an  
abnormality.  
l
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, a clicking noise  
from the brake booster may be heard. This  
is a normal effect of the brake assist and  
does not indicate an abnormality.  
l
The brake assist equipment does not  
supersede the functionality of the vehicle's  
main braking system.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
(6-speed transaxle)  
CAUTION  
Vehicles with 6-speed transaxle are  
equipped with a device to prevent shifting  
to R (reverse) by mistake. Push the shift  
lever downward and shift to R.  
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal  
except when shifting gears. Also,  
do not use the clutch to hold the  
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the  
clutch will cause needless clutch  
wear and damage.  
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a  
complete stop before shifting to R.  
Shifting to R while the vehicle is  
still moving may damage the  
transaxle.  
NOTE  
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into  
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try  
again.  
WARNING  
Do not use sudden engine braking on  
slippery road surfaces or at high  
speeds:  
qRecommendations for Shifting  
Upshifting  
For normal acceleration, we recommend these shift  
points.  
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed  
could cause the tires to skid. This  
could lead to loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
Gear  
1 to 2  
5-speed transaxle 6-speed transaxle  
21 km/h (13 mph) 24 km/h (15 mph)  
39 km/h (24 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph)  
55 km/h (34 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph)  
79 km/h (49 mph) 73 km/h (45 mph)  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
81 km/h (50 mph)  
For cruising  
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R  
position and set the parking brake  
when leaving the vehicle unattended:  
Otherwise the vehicle could move  
and cause an accident.  
Gear  
1 to 2  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
5-speed transaxle 6-speed transaxle  
18 km/h (11 mph) 24 km/h (15 mph)  
29 km/h (18 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph)  
47 km/h (29 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph)  
68 km/h (42 mph) 73 km/h (45 mph)  
81 km/h (50 mph)  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy  
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift  
before the engine starts to overwork. This  
reduces the chance of stalling and gives  
better acceleration when you need more  
speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting  
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs  
brake life.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Automatic Transaxle Controls  
Various Lockouts:  
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition  
switch must be in the ON position).  
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.  
NOTE  
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle - giving the  
driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even if  
you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be  
aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be  
retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the  
engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 5-14).  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTransaxle Ranges  
WARNING  
If the engine is running faster than idle,  
do not shift from N or P into a driving  
gear:  
The shift lever must be in P or N to  
operate the starter.  
P (Park)  
It's dangerous to shift from N or P  
into a driving gear when the engine  
is running faster than idle. If this is  
done, the vehicle could move  
suddenly, causing an accident or  
serious injury.  
P locks the transaxle and prevents the  
front wheels from rotating.  
WARNING  
Always set the shift lever to P and set  
the parking brake:  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle:  
Only setting the shift lever to the P  
position without using the parking  
brake to hold the vehicle is  
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the  
vehicle could move and cause an  
accident.  
Shifting into N while driving is  
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be  
applied when decelerating which  
could lead to an accident or serious  
injury.  
CAUTION  
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the  
vehicle is moving can damage  
your transaxle.  
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or  
reverse when the engine is running  
faster than idle can damage the  
transaxle.  
CAUTION  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle  
damage.  
NOTE  
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake  
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to  
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.  
R (Reverse)  
In position R, the vehicle moves only  
backward. You must be at a complete stop  
before shifting to or from R, except under  
rare circumstances as explained in  
Rocking the Vehicle (page 4-9).  
D (Drive)  
D is the normal driving position. From a  
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift  
through a 4-gear/5-gear* sequence.  
* 2.3-liter engine model  
N (Neutral)  
M (Manual)  
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not  
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even  
on the slightest incline unless the parking  
brake or brakes are on.  
M is the manual shift mode position.  
Gears can be shifted up or down by  
operating the shift lever.  
Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-14).  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
4. Take the vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer to have the system  
checked.  
qShift-Lock System  
The shift-lock system prevents shifting  
out of P unless the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
qManual Shift Mode  
To shift from P:  
This mode gives you the feel of driving a  
manual transaxle vehicle by operating the  
shift lever and allows you to control  
engine rpm and torque to the front wheels  
much like a manual transaxle when more  
control is desired.  
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Start the engine.  
3. Move the shift lever.  
NOTE  
l
To change to manual shift mode, shift the  
lever from D to M.  
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or  
LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be  
shifted from P.  
NOTE  
l
To be sure the vehicle is in park, the  
ignition key cannot be removed unless the  
shift lever is in P.  
Changing to manual mode can be done while  
driving the vehicle with no damage occurring  
to the transaxle.  
qShift-Lock Override  
If the shift lever will not move from P  
using the proper shift procedure, continue  
to hold down the pedal.  
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover  
using a cloth-wrapped flat head  
screwdriver.  
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.  
To return to automatic shift mode, shift  
the lever from M to D.  
3. Move the shift lever.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
l
If you change to manual shift mode when  
If the gears cannot be shifted down when  
driving at higher speeds, the gear position  
indicator will flash twice to signal that the  
gears cannot be shifted down.  
the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to  
M1.  
If you shift up once when the vehicle is  
stopped and the gear is at M1, the gear will  
shift to M2. M2 is helpful for starting on  
slippery surfaces.  
l
l
l
If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)  
temperature becomes too high, there is the  
possibility that the transaxle will switch to  
automatic shift mode, canceling manual  
shift mode and turning off the gear position  
indicator illumination. This is a normal  
function to protect the AT. After the ATF  
temperature has decreased, the gear  
position indicator illumination turns back  
on and driving in manual shift mode is  
restored.  
(2.3-liter engine model)  
If you change to manual shift mode without  
depressing the accelerator pedal when  
driving in D range, 5th gear, the gear will  
shift to M4.  
Indicators  
Shift position indicator  
In manual shift mode, the Mof the shift  
position indicator in the instrument panel  
illuminates.  
Shifting  
Manually Shifting up  
(M1M2M3M4M5*)  
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift  
lever back ( ) once.  
Gear position indicator  
The numeral for the selected gear  
illuminates.  
* 2.3-liter engine model  
Shift position  
indicator  
Gear position indicator  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
WARNING  
l
When driving slowly, the gears may not  
Do not use sudden engine braking on  
slippery road surfaces or at high  
speeds:  
shift up depending on vehicle speed.  
l
In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up  
automatically. Don't run the engine with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If the  
tachometer needle enters the RED ZONE,  
you may feel engine-braking because the  
fuel delivery will be stopped to protect the  
engine. However, this does not indicate an  
abnormality.  
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed  
could cause the tires to skid. This  
could lead to loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the  
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed.  
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R  
position and set the parking brake  
when leaving the vehicle unattended:  
Otherwise the vehicle could move  
and cause an accident.  
Manually Shifting down  
(M5*M4M3M2M1)  
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift  
lever forward ( ) once.  
* 2.3-liter engine model  
NOTE  
l
When driving at high speeds, the gear may  
not shift down depending on vehicle speed.  
l
During deceleration, the gear may  
automatically shift down depending on  
vehicle speed.  
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the  
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed.  
Second gear fixed mode  
When the shift lever is tapped back (  
)
while the vehicle is stopped or driven at  
the following speeds, the transaxle is set  
in the second gear fixed mode.  
2.0-liter engine model:  
14 km/h (8 mph) or less  
2.3-liter engine model:  
20 km/h (12 mph) or less  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
The gear is fixed in second while in this  
mode for easier starting and driving on  
slippery roads. If the shift lever is tapped  
back ( ) or forward ( ) while in the  
second gear fixed mode, the mode will be  
canceled.  
If the vehicle is kicked down at the  
following speeds or lower, the gears shift  
down automatically:  
Gear  
M4M3  
M3M2  
Vehicle speed  
170 km/h (105 mph)  
72 km/h (44 mph)  
Shifting specification (2.0-liter engine  
model)  
Shifting specification (2.3-liter engine  
model)  
Shifting up  
Shifting up  
If the vehicle speed is lower than the  
speed specified for each gear, the gear  
cannot be shifted up to a higher gear.  
If the vehicle speed is lower than the  
speed specified for each gear, the gear  
cannot be shifted up to a higher gear.  
Gear  
M1M2  
Vehicle speed  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
You can shift up to M2 whether  
the vehicle is stopped or moving.  
You can shift up to M2 whether  
the vehicle is stopped or  
moving.  
M1M2  
M2M3  
20 km/h (12 mph)  
40 km/h (24 mph)  
M3M4  
M2M3  
M3M4  
M4M5  
20 km/h (12 mph)  
Shifting down  
33 km/h (21 mph)  
If the vehicle speed is higher than the  
speed specified for each gear, the gear  
cannot be shifted to a lower gear so as to  
protect the transaxle.  
Shifting down  
If the vehicle speed is higher than the  
speed specified for each gear, the gear  
cannot be shifted to a lower gear so as to  
protect the transaxle.  
Gear  
M4M3  
Vehicle speed  
180 km/h (112 mph)  
119 km/h (74 mph)  
47 km/h (30 mph)  
M3M2  
Gear  
M5M4  
Vehicle speed  
191 km/h (118 mph)  
137 km/h (85 mph)  
89 km/h (55 mph)  
M2M1  
M4M3  
M3M2  
M2M1  
During deceleration, the gears shift down  
automatically when speed is reduced to  
the following:  
44 km/h (27 mph)  
Gear  
M4M3  
Vehicle speed  
36 km/h (22 mph)  
During deceleration, the gears shift down  
automatically when speed is reduced to  
the following:  
M3 or M2M1 12 km/h (7 mph)  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
NOTE  
M5 or M4M3 30 km/h (18 mph)  
The gear does not shift down to M1  
automatically while in the second gear fixed  
mode.  
M3 or M2M1 10 km/h (6 mph)  
NOTE  
The gear does not shift down to M1  
automatically while in the second gear fixed  
mode.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
If the vehicle is kicked down at the  
following speeds or lower, the gears shift  
down automatically:  
qDriving Tips  
Passing  
For extra power when passing another  
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress  
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will  
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle  
speed.  
Gear  
M5M4  
Vehicle speed  
182 km/h (113 mph)  
133 km/h (82 mph)  
48 km/h (30 mph)  
M4M3  
M3M2  
Recommendations for shifting  
Climbing steep grades from a stop  
Upshifting  
To climb a steep grade from a stopped  
position:  
For normal acceleration and cruising, we  
recommend these shift points.  
(2.0-liter engine model)  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the  
load weight and grade steepness.  
Gear  
M1 to M2  
Vehicle speed  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
3. Release the brake pedal while  
gradually accelerating.  
(2.3-liter engine model)  
Gear  
Descending steep grades  
Vehicle speed  
When descending a steep grade, shift to  
lower gears, depending on load weight  
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,  
using the brakes only occasionally to  
prevent them from overheating.  
M1 to M2  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
M4 to M5  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
73 km/h (45 mph)  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy  
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift  
before the engine starts to overwork. This  
gives better acceleration when you need  
more speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting  
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs  
brake life.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
If the light stays illuminated after the  
engine is started or illuminates while  
driving, turn off the engine after parking  
in a safe place, and then start the engine  
again.  
If the light does not illuminate after  
restarting the engine, this indicates that  
the power steering is restored and normal  
steering is possible.  
Power Steering  
Power steering is only operable when the  
engine is running. If the engine is off or if  
the power steering system is inoperable,  
you can still steer, but it requires more  
physical effort.  
If the steering feels stiffer than usual  
during normal driving, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If the light remains illuminated, the power  
steering is still inoperable. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
CAUTION  
NOTE  
The power steering system is inoperable when  
the power steering malfunction indicator light  
illuminates. Steering is possible, but requires  
more physical effort.  
Never hold the steering wheel to the  
extreme left or right for more than 5  
seconds with the engine running.  
This could damage the power  
steering system.  
qPower Steering Malfunction  
Indicator Lightí  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and goes off when the engine is  
started.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qActivation/Deactivation  
Cruise Controlí  
To activate the system, press the ON/OFF  
switch.  
The cruise main indicator light  
illuminates.  
With cruise control, you can set and  
automatically maintain any speed of more  
than about 30 km/h (19 mph).  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control under the  
following conditions:  
To deactivate the system, press the switch  
again.  
The cruise main indicator light turns off.  
Using the cruise control under the  
following conditions is dangerous  
and could result in loss of vehicle  
control.  
Ø Hilly terrain  
Ø Steep inclines  
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic  
Ø Slippery or winding roads  
Ø Similar restrictions that require  
inconsistent speed  
qCruise Main Indicator Light  
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator  
Light (Green)  
WARNING  
Keep the ON/OFF switch off when  
cruise control is not in use:  
Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when  
not using the cruise control is  
dangerous as you may hit one of the  
other buttons and put the vehicle in  
cruise control unexpectedly. This  
could result in loss of vehicle control.  
The indicator light has two colors.  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)  
qTo Set Speed  
The indicator light illuminates amber  
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and  
the cruise control system is activated.  
1. Activate the cruise control system by  
pressing the ON/OFF switch.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which  
must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).  
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
The indicator light illuminates green when  
a cruising speed has been set.  
5-20  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
3. Press the SET/COAST switch and  
release it at the speed you want.  
qTo Increase Cruising Speed  
Follow either of these procedures.  
Release the accelerator simultaneously.  
To increase speed using cruise control  
switch  
Press the RES/ACCEL switch and hold it.  
Your vehicle will accelerate.  
Release the switch at the speed you want.  
Do not continue to hold in the switch.  
Until you release it, speed will continue to  
drop (unless you continue to accelerate)  
and you'll miss the desired speed.  
NOTE  
l
The SET function cannot be activated until  
about 2 seconds after the ON/OFF switch  
has been engaged.  
On a steep grade, the vehicle may  
momentarily slow down while ascending,  
or speed up while descending.  
Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that  
allows you to increase your current speed  
in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a  
momentary tap of the RES/ACCEL  
switch. Multiple taps will increase your  
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each  
tap.  
l
l
Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed  
drops below 25 km/h (16 mph) when cruise  
is activated, such as when climbing a steep  
grade.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that  
allows you to decrease your current speed  
in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a  
momentary tap of the SET/COAST  
switch. Multiple taps will decrease your  
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each  
tap.  
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate  
to the desired speed.  
Press the SET/COAST switch and release  
it immediately.  
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at  
More Than 30 km/h (19 mph)  
If some other method besides the ON/  
OFF switch was used to cancel cruising  
speed (such as applying the brake pedal)  
and the system is still activated, the most  
recent set speed will automatically resume  
when the RES/ACCEL switch is pressed.  
If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19  
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 30  
km/h (19 mph) or more and press the  
RES/ACCEL switch.  
NOTE  
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily  
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed  
will not interfere with or change the set speed.  
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to  
the set speed.  
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed  
Press the SET/COAST switch and hold it.  
The vehicle will gradually slow.  
Release the switch at the speed you want.  
qTo Cancel  
To cancel the system, use one of these  
methods:  
l
Press the ON/OFF switch.  
Slightly depress the brake pedal.  
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual  
l
l
transaxle only).  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
Press the CANCEL switch.  
Traction Control System  
(TCS)í  
The Traction Control System (TCS)  
enhances traction and safety by  
controlling engine torque and braking*.  
When the TCS detects driving wheel  
slippage, it lowers engine torque and  
operates the brakes* to prevent loss of  
traction.  
This means that on a slick surface, the  
engine adjusts automatically to provide  
optimum power to the drive wheels  
without causing them to spin and lose  
traction.  
The system turns off when the ignition is  
off.  
NOTE  
Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9  
mph) below the preset speed (such as may  
happen when climbing a long, steep grade) or  
below 25 km/h (16 mph).  
* DSC-equipped vehicles only  
WARNING  
Do not rely on the traction control  
system as a substitute for safe driving:  
The traction control system (TCS)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road  
contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an  
accident.  
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive  
at reduced speeds when roads are  
covered with ice and/or snow:  
Driving without proper traction  
devices on snow and/or ice-covered  
roads is dangerous. The traction  
control system (TCS) alone cannot  
provide adequate traction and you  
could still have an accident.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-23  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
Dynamic Stability Control  
(DSC)í  
To turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF switch  
(page 5-25).  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
automatically controls braking and engine  
torque in conjunction with systems such  
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip  
when driving on slippery surfaces, or  
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,  
enhancing vehicle safety.  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light  
Refer to ABS (page 5-7) and TCS (page  
5-23).  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is  
operating, the indicator light flashes.  
DSC operation is possible at speeds  
greater than20 km/h (12 mph).  
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may  
have a malfunction and they may not  
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on the dynamic stability  
control as a substitute for safe driving:  
The dynamic stability control (DSC)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road  
contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an  
accident.  
NOTE  
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a  
slight lugging sound will come from the  
engine. This indicates that the TCS is  
operating properly.  
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it  
will be impossible to achieve high rpm  
when the TCS is on.  
5-24  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qDSC OFF Indicator Light  
CAUTION  
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly  
unless the following are observed:  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Use tires of the correct size  
specified for your Mazda on all  
four wheels.  
Use tires of the same  
manufacturer, brand and tread  
pattern on all four wheels.  
Do not mix worn tires.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is  
switched off (page 5-25).  
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly  
when tire chains are used or a  
temporary spare tire is installed  
because the tire diameter changes.  
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is  
not switched off, take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic  
stability control may have a malfunction.  
NOTE  
After turning the ignition switch to the ON  
position, a clicking sound may be heard behind  
the dashboard. This sound is the result of the  
DSC system self-check operation and does not  
indicate an abnormality.  
qDSC OFF Switch  
To turn off the TCS/DSC, press and hold  
the DSC OFF switch until the DSC OFF  
indicator light illuminates.  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is  
operating, the indicator light flashes.  
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may  
have a malfunction and they may not  
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/  
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator  
light will go out.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
l
When DSC is on and you attempt to free the  
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of  
freshly fallen snow, the TCS (part of the  
DSC system) will activate. Depressing the  
accelerator will not increase engine power  
and freeing the vehicle may be difficult.  
When this happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.  
l
If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine is  
turned off, it automatically activates when  
the ignition switch is turned on.  
l
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide the  
best stability.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí  
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.  
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the  
warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.  
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to  
the receiver unit in the vehicle.  
Tire pressure sensors  
NOTE  
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.  
When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light  
may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire  
pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire  
pressure gauge is recommended.  
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires  
regularly.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-27  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
CAUTION  
Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold  
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a  
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those  
tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure  
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire  
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as  
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-  
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's  
handling and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it  
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-  
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire  
pressure telltale.  
Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to  
indicate when the system is not operating properly.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.  
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately  
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will  
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to  
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a  
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or  
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on  
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow  
the TPMS to continue to function properly.  
Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a  
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or  
blow out.  
NOTE  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTire Pressure Monitoring System  
WARNING  
Warning Light  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes, or  
the tire pressure warning beep sound is  
heard, decrease vehicle speed  
immediately and avoid sudden  
maneuvering and braking:  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes,  
or the tire pressure warning beep  
sound is heard, it is dangerous to  
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or  
perform sudden maneuvering or  
braking. Vehicle drivability could  
worsen and result in an accident.  
To determine if you have a slow leak  
or a flat, pull over to a safe position  
where you can check the visual  
condition of the tire and determine if  
you have enough air to proceed to a  
place where air may be added and  
the system monitored again, an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire  
repair station.  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates  
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is  
too low in one or more tires, and flashes  
when there is a system malfunction.  
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:  
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is  
dangerous, even if you know why it is  
illuminated. Have the problem taken  
care of as soon as possible before it  
develops into a more serious  
situation that could lead to tire  
failure and a dangerous accident.  
Warning light illuminates/Warning  
beep sounds  
When the warning light illuminates, and  
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3  
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or  
more tires.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire  
pressure. Refer to the specification charts  
(page 10-8).  
NOTE  
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the  
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary  
according to the tire temperature, therefore  
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive  
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting  
the tire pressures. When pressure is  
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation  
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may  
turn on after the tires cool and pressure  
drops below specification.  
CAUTION  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,  
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping  
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn  
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this  
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the  
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning  
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air  
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the  
tire air pressures.  
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may  
require some time for the TPMS warning  
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light  
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a  
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10  
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.  
Tires loose air naturally over time and the  
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too  
soft over time or you have a flat. However,  
when you find one low tire in a set of four-  
that is an indication of trouble; you should  
have someone drive the vehicle slowly  
forward so you can inspect any low tire for  
cuts and any metal objects sticking through  
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water  
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles  
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be  
addressed by more than simply refilling the  
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has  
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems  
and order the best replacement tire for your  
vehicle.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
l
l
l
If the warning light illuminates again even  
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there  
may be a tire puncture. Replace the  
punctured tire with the temporary spare  
tire (page 7-8).  
When the tire pressure sensor batteries  
are exhausted.  
When using a wheel with no tire  
pressure sensor installed.  
When using tires with steel wire  
reinforcement in the side walls.  
When using tire chains.  
NOTE  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used.  
qTires and Wheels  
CAUTION  
Warning light flashes  
When inspecting or adjusting the tire  
air pressures, do not apply excessive  
force to the stem part of the wheel  
unit. The stem part could be  
damaged.  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qSystem Error Activation  
Changing tires and wheels  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The following procedure allows the  
TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's  
unique ID signal code whenever tires or  
wheels are changed, such as changing to  
and from winter tires.  
A system error activation may occur in  
the following cases:  
l
When there is equipment or a device  
NOTE  
near the vehicle using the same radio  
frequency as that of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
When a large metallic object (e.g. a  
large electric household appliance or a  
desk-top computer) is placed on the  
right side of the rear seat, which may  
block radio signals from the tire  
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID  
signal code. The signal code must be  
registered with the TPMS before it can work.  
The easiest way to do it is to have an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and  
complete ID signal code registration.  
l
When having tires changed at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer  
pressure sensor to the receiver unit.  
When using the following devices in  
the vehicle that may cause radio  
interference with the receiver unit.  
l
Tire pressure sensor ID signal code  
registration is completed when an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your  
vehicle's tires.  
l
A digital device such as a personal  
computer.  
A current converter device such as a  
l
DC-AC converter.  
l
When excess snow or ice adheres to  
the vehicle, especially around the  
wheels.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
When changing tires yourself  
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors  
installed whenever tires or wheels are  
replaced.  
If you or someone else changes tires, you  
or someone else can also undertake the  
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID  
signal code registration.  
When having a tire or wheel or both  
replaced, the following types of tire  
pressure sensor installations are possible.  
l
1. After tires have been changed, turn the  
ignition switch to the ON position, then  
turn it back to the ACC or LOCK  
position.  
The tire pressure sensor is removed  
from the old wheel and installed to the  
new one.  
The same tire pressure sensor is used  
l
with the same wheel. Only the tire is  
replaced.  
A new tire pressure sensor is installed  
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.  
l
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the  
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h  
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire  
pressure sensor ID signal code will be  
registered automatically.  
to a new wheel.  
NOTE  
l
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code  
must be registered when a new tire pressure  
sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire  
pressure sensor and registration of the tire  
pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes  
of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring  
system warning light will flash because the  
sensor ID signal code would not have been  
registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for  
about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID  
signal code will register upon driving the  
vehicle for 10 minutes.  
l
When reinstalling a previously removed tire  
pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the  
grommet (seal between valve body/sensor  
and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.  
Replacing tires and wheels  
CAUTION  
Ø When replacing/repairing the tires  
or wheels or both, have the work  
done by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors  
may be damaged.  
Ø The wheels equipped on your  
Mazda are specially designed for  
installation of the tire pressure  
sensors. Do not use non-genuine  
wheels, otherwise it may not be  
possible to install the tire pressure  
sensors.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
Meters and Gauges  
(Black-out meter)  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the dashboard gauges illuminate.  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................................................................. page 5-35  
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 5-36  
Instrument Cluster Dimmer Select Button (Black-out meter) ............................ page 5-36  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
qSpeedometer  
The speedometer indicates the speed of  
the vehicle.  
qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
Trip meter A  
Odometer  
Meter Selector  
The display mode can be changed  
between trip meter A and trip meter B by  
pressing the selector while one of them is  
displayed. The selected mode will be  
displayed.  
Press the selector  
Selector  
Trip meter B  
Odometer  
Press the selector  
Trip meter  
NOTE  
l
(Standard meter)  
Odometer  
The odometer and trip meter can be  
displayed as follows even when the ignition  
switch is in the ACC or LOCK position.  
l
Displays for 10 minutes after the  
ignition switch is turned to the ACC or  
LOCK position from the ON position.  
Displays for 10 minutes after the  
l
driver's door is opened.  
l
(Black-out meter)  
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or  
LOCK position, the odometer or trip meters  
cannot be displayed, however, pressing the  
selector button can inadvertently switch the  
trip meters or reset them during an  
approximate ten-minute period in the  
following cases:  
l
After the ignition switch is turned to the  
ACC or LOCK position from the ON  
position.  
After the driver's door is opened.  
l
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
Odometer  
qTachometer  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
Trip meter  
The trip meter can record the total  
distance of two trips. One is recorded in  
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in  
trip meter B.  
For instance, trip meter A can record the  
distance from the point of origin, and trip  
meter B can record the distance from  
where the fuel tank is filled.  
Red zone  
With turbocharger  
Without turbocharger  
When trip meter A is selected, pressing  
the selector again within one second will  
change to trip meter B mode.  
CAUTION  
Do not run the engine with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.  
This may cause severe engine  
damage.  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
The trip meter records the total distance  
the vehicle is driven until the meter is  
again reset. Return it to 0.0by holding  
the selector depressed for 1 second or  
more. Use this meter to measure trip  
distances and to compute fuel  
q
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
The engine coolant temperature gauge  
shows the temperature of the engine  
coolant.  
consumption.  
NOTE  
l
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
kilometers (miles).  
l
The trip record will be erased when:  
l
The power supply is interrupted (blown  
fuse or the battery is disconnected).  
The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km  
l
(mile).  
If the needle is near H, it indicates  
overheating.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
qDashboard Illumination  
CAUTION  
Driving with an overheated engine  
can cause serious engine damage  
(page 7-14).  
When the exterior lights are on, rotate the  
thumb-wheel to adjust the brightness of  
the dashboard lights.  
Bright  
qFuel Gauge  
The fuel gauge shows approximately how  
much fuel is remaining in the tank when  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4  
full. When the low fuel warning light  
illuminates or when the needle is near E,  
refuel as soon as possible.  
Dim  
NOTE  
Black-out meter  
When the instrument cluster dimmer is  
canceled, the instrument cluster illumination  
intensity will not change by rotating the  
thumb-wheel.  
Low fuel  
warning light  
Refer to Instrument Cluster Dimmer Select  
Button on page 5-36.  
qInstrument Cluster Dimmer  
NOTE  
Select Button (Black-out meter)  
l
After refueling, it may require some time for  
the needle to stabilize. In addition, the  
needle may deviate while driving on a slope  
or curve since the fuel moves in the tank.  
The instrument cluster dimmer select  
button is operable when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position.  
l
The direction of the arrow (  
) shows next  
Instrument cluster dimmer select button  
to the low fuel warning light indicates that  
the fuel-filler lid is on the right side of the  
vehicle.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
Adjusting the instrument cluster  
illumination intensity (With exterior  
lights off)  
When the exterior lights are off, the  
instrument cluster illumination can be  
adjusted to one of five levels by  
successively pressing the instrument  
cluster dimmer select button.  
Canceling the instrument cluster  
illumination dimmer (With exterior  
lights on)  
When the exterior lights are on, the  
instrument cluster illumination dims.  
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,  
or in other situations when the instrument  
cluster's visibility is reduced due to glare  
from surrounding brightness, the  
instrument cluster dimmer select button  
increases the illumination intensity.  
Press the button to increase the intensity  
of the instrument cluster illumination.  
Press the button again to return to the  
previous illumination intensity.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas  
Signal  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Brake System Warning Light  
Page  
5-40  
Charging System Warning Light  
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light  
Check Engine Light  
5-41  
5-41  
5-42  
5-40  
5-42  
5-43  
ABS Warning Light  
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Signal  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
Page  
5-43  
Door-Ajar Warning Light  
5-44  
5-44  
5-45  
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light  
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  
5-45  
Security Indicator Light  
5-47  
5-47  
5-47  
5-48  
5-48  
5-48  
5-48  
5-49  
5-49  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
Shift Position Indicator Light  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
DSC OFF Indicator Light  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
Lights-On Indicator Light  
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
NOTE  
qBrake System Warning Light  
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an  
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the  
brake light is no longer illuminated.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the brake system  
warning light illuminated. Contact an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the  
brakes inspected as soon as possible:  
Driving with the brake system  
This warning has the following functions:  
Parking brake warning  
The light illuminates when the parking  
brake is applied with the ignition switch  
in the START or ON position. It turns off  
when the parking brake is fully released.  
warning light illuminated is  
dangerous. It indicates that your  
brakes may not work at all or that  
they could completely fail at any  
time. If this light remains  
Low brake fluid level warning  
If the light stays on after the parking brake  
is fully released, you may have a brake  
problem.  
illuminated, after checking that the  
parking brake is fully released, have  
the brakes inspected immediately.  
qABS Warning Lightí  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way.  
You may notice that the pedal is harder to  
depress or that it may go closer to the  
floor. In either case, it will take longer to  
stop the vehicle.  
1. With the engine stopped, open the  
hood and check the brake fluid level  
immediately, and then add fluid if  
required (page 8-23).  
The warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
2. After adding fluid, check the light  
again.  
If the ABS warning light stays on while  
you're driving, the ABS control unit has  
detected a system malfunction. If this  
occurs, your brakes will function normally  
as if the vehicle had no ABS.  
If the warning light remains on, or if the  
brakes do not operate properly, do not  
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Should this happen, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Even if the light turns off have your brake  
system inspected as soon as possible by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-40  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
NOTE  
qCharging System Warning Light  
When the engine is jump-started to charge the  
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS  
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it  
is the result of the weak battery and does not  
indicate an ABS malfunction.  
Recharge the battery.  
qElectronic Brake Force  
This warning light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and turns off when the engine is  
started.  
Distribution System Warningí  
If the warning light illuminates while  
driving, it indicates a malfunction of the  
alternator or of the charging system.  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If the electronic brake force distribution  
control unit determines that some  
components are operating incorrectly, the  
control unit may illuminate the brake  
system warning light and the ABS  
warning light on simultaneously. The  
problem is likely to be the electronic  
brake force distribution system.  
CAUTION  
Do not continue driving when the  
charging system warning light is  
illuminated because the engine could  
stop unexpectedly.  
WARNING  
q
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light  
Do not drive with both the ABS warning  
light and brake warning light  
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the brakes inspected as soon as  
possible:  
Driving when the brake system  
warning light and ABS warning light  
are illuminated simultaneously is  
dangerous.  
When both lights are illuminated, the  
rear wheels could lock more quickly  
in an emergency stop than under  
normal circumstances.  
This warning light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and turns off when the engine is  
started.  
This warning light indicates low engine  
oil pressure.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-41  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
If the light illuminates while driving:  
The check engine light may illuminate in  
the following cases:  
1. Drive to the side of the road and park  
off the right-of-way on level ground.  
l
The fuel tank level being very low or  
approaching empty.  
The engine's electrical system has a  
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes  
for the oil to drain back into the oil  
pan.  
problem.  
The emission control system has a  
l
problem.  
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not  
3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 8-20).  
If it's low, add the appropriate amount  
of engine oil while being careful not to  
overfill.  
l
tightened securely.  
If the check engine light remains on or  
flashes continuously, do not drive at high  
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
4. Start the engine and check the warning  
light.  
If the light remains illuminated even after  
you add oil, stop the engine immediately  
and have your vehicle towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
CAUTION  
Do not run the engine if the oil  
pressure is low. It could result in  
extensive engine damage.  
qCheck Engine Light  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition switch  
is turned to the ON position or after the  
engine is cranked. The warning light turns  
off after a specified period of time.  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly illuminates or  
does not illuminate at all when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position. If any of these occur, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible. The system may not work in an  
accident.  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and turns off when the engine is  
started.  
If this light illuminates while driving, the  
vehicle may have a problem. It is  
important to note the driving conditions  
when the light illuminated and consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Conditions of operation  
WARNING  
Condition  
Result  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light  
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep  
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard  
position.  
for about 6 seconds.  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened while the warning  
light and the beep sound are  
activated.  
The warning light  
turns off and the beep  
sound stops.  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the  
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be  
The warning light will  
position.  
heard.  
qLow Fuel Warning Light  
Belt minder  
NOTE  
Low fuel  
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or  
restore the seat belt minder.  
warning light  
Driver seated/Front passenger not  
seated  
This warning light in the fuel gauge  
signals that the fuel tank will soon be  
empty.  
The belt minder is a supplemental  
warning to the seat belt warning function.  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
ON position, the warning light/beep  
operates to give you further reminders  
according to the chart below.  
Refuel as soon as possible.  
qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 20  
km/h  
(0 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
and a beep sound will be heard if the  
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position.  
Indicator  
Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
Driver seated/Front passenger seated  
The seat belt warning function reminds  
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt  
according to the chart below.  
NOTE  
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight  
sensor to function properly, do not place  
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the  
front passenger seat. The sensor may not  
function properly because the additional  
seat cushion could cause sensor  
interference.  
l
When a small child sits on the front  
passenger seat, it is possible that neither  
the warning light nor the warning beep  
operate.  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 20  
km/h  
(0 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
(Driver)  
qDoor-Ajar Warning Light  
Seat belt  
(Passenger)  
Indicator  
Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
This warning light illuminates when any  
door, trunk, or liftgate is not securely  
closed.  
Placing heavy items on the front  
passenger seat may cause the front  
passenger seat belt warning function to  
operate depending on the weight of the  
item.  
Close the door, trunk, or liftgate securely  
before driving the vehicle.  
qLow Washer Fluid Level  
Warning Lightí  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
This warning light indicates that little  
washer fluid remains. Add fluid (page  
8-27).  
5-44  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
q
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light  
WARNING  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes, or  
the tire pressure warning beep sound is  
heard, decrease vehicle speed  
immediately and avoid sudden  
maneuvering and braking:  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes,  
or the tire pressure warning beep  
sound is heard, it is dangerous to  
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or  
perform sudden maneuvering or  
braking. Vehicle drivability could  
worsen and result in an accident.  
To determine if you have a slow leak  
or a flat, pull over to a safe position  
where you can check the visual  
condition of the tire and determine if  
you have enough air to proceed to a  
place where air may be added and  
the system monitored again, an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire  
repair station.  
This warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
The light illuminates when the transaxle  
has a problem.  
CAUTION  
If the automatic transaxle warning  
light illuminates, the transaxle has  
an electrical problem. Continuing to  
drive your Mazda in this condition  
could cause damage to your  
transaxle. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
qTire Pressure Monitoring System  
Warning Lightí  
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:  
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is  
dangerous, even if you know why it is  
illuminated. Have the problem taken  
care of as soon as possible before it  
develops into a more serious  
situation that could lead to tire  
failure and a dangerous accident.  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
Warning light illuminates/Warning  
beep sounds  
When the warning light illuminates, and  
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3  
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or  
more tires.  
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates  
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is  
too low in one or more tires, and flashes  
when there is a system malfunction.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-45  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire  
pressure. Refer to the specification charts  
(page 10-8).  
NOTE  
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the  
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary  
according to the tire temperature, therefore  
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive  
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting  
the tire pressures. When pressure is  
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation  
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may  
turn on after the tires cool and pressure  
drops below specification.  
CAUTION  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,  
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping  
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn  
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this  
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the  
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning  
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air  
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the  
tire air pressures.  
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may  
require some time for the TPMS warning  
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light  
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a  
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10  
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.  
Tires loose air naturally over time and the  
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too  
soft over time or you have a flat. However,  
when you find one low tire in a set of four-  
that is an indication of trouble; you should  
have someone drive the vehicle slowly  
forward so you can inspect any low tire for  
cuts and any metal objects sticking through  
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water  
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles  
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be  
addressed by more than simply refilling the  
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has  
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems  
and order the best replacement tire for your  
vehicle.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
If the warning light illuminates again even  
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator  
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there  
may be a tire puncture. Replace the  
punctured tire with the temporary spare  
tire (page 7-8).  
Light  
NOTE  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used.  
This light indicates one of two things:  
l
The high-beam headlights are on.  
Warning light flashes  
l
The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
pass position.  
qShift Position Indicator Light  
(Automatic Transaxle)  
qSecurity Indicator Light  
This indicates the selected shift position  
when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position.  
This indicator light starts flashing every 2  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
from the ON to the ACC position and the  
immobilizer system is armed.  
The light stops flashing when the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON position with  
the correct ignition key.  
At this time, the immobilizer system is  
disarmed and the light illuminates for  
about 3 seconds and then turns off.  
If the engine does not start with the  
correct ignition key, and the security  
indicator light keeps illuminating or  
flashing, the system may have a  
malfunction. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Gear position indicator  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Gear position indicator  
qCruise Main Indicator Light  
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator  
Light (Green)í  
When the shift lever is in the D or M  
position, the numeral for the selected gear  
displays.  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Lightí  
The indicator light has two colors.  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)  
The indicator light illuminates amber  
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and  
the cruise control system is activated.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is  
operating, the indicator light flashes.  
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
The indicator light illuminates green when  
a cruising speed has been set.  
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may  
have a malfunction and they may not  
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qLights-On Indicator Light  
(Black-out meter)  
qDSC OFF Indicator Lightí  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
exterior lights and dashboard illumination  
are on.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition switch is turned  
to the ON position.  
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is  
switched off (page 5-25).  
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is  
not switched off, take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic  
stability control may have a malfunction.  
5-48  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qPower Steering Malfunction  
qTurn-Signal/Hazard Warning  
Indicator Lightí  
Indicator Lights  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and goes off when the engine is  
started.  
When operating the turn signal lights, the  
left or right turn signal indicator light  
flashes to indicate which turn signal light  
is operating (page 5-54).  
If the light stays illuminated after the  
engine is started or illuminates while  
driving, turn off the engine after parking  
in a safe place, and then start the engine  
again.  
If the light does not illuminate after  
restarting the engine, this indicates that  
the power steering is restored and normal  
steering is possible.  
When operating the hazard warning  
lights, both turn signal indicator lights  
flash (page 5-61).  
NOTE  
If an indicator light remains illuminated (does  
not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the  
turn signal bulbs may be burned out.  
If the light remains illuminated, the power  
steering is still inoperable. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
The power steering system is inoperable when  
the power steering malfunction indicator light  
illuminates. Steering is possible, but requires  
more physical effort.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-49  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qIgnition Key Reminder  
Beep Sounds  
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or  
ACC position with the key inserted, a  
continuous beep sound will be heard  
when the driver's door is opened.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
If a malfunction is detected in both the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
and the warning light, a warning beep  
sound will be heard for about 1 minute.  
After that, the one-minute beep will be  
repeated every 30 minutes.  
qLights-On Reminder  
If lights are on and the key is removed  
from the ignition switch, a continuous  
beep sound will be heard when the  
driver's door is opened.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning  
Beepí  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
The warning beep sound will be heard for  
about 3 seconds when there is any  
abnormality in tire inflation pressures  
(page 5-27).  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
qSeat Belt Warning Beep  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
ON position, a beep sound will be heard  
for about 6 seconds.  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and  
the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than  
about 20 km/h (12 mph), a beep sound  
will be heard again for a specified period  
of time.  
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on  
page 5-43.  
5-50  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Type B (With AUTO position)  
Lighting Control  
qHeadlights  
Type A (Without AUTO position)  
Turn the headlight switch to turn the  
headlights, other exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination on or off.  
Switch Position  
Turn the headlight switch to turn the  
headlights, other exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination on or off.  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License lights  
Side-marker  
lights  
Dashboard  
illumination  
Switch Position  
Auto  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License lights  
Side-marker lights  
Dashboard illumination  
NOTE  
To prevent discharging the battery, do not  
leave the lights on while the engine is off  
unless safety requires them.  
NOTE  
To prevent discharging the battery, do not  
leave the lights on while the engine is off  
unless safety requires them.  
AUTO (Auto-light control)  
When the headlight switch is in the  
AUTO position and the ignition switch is  
in the ON position, the light sensor senses  
the surrounding lightness or darkness and  
automatically turns on or off the  
headlights, other exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination (see chart above).  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
l
The light may not turn off immediately even  
if the surrounding area becomes well-lit  
because the light sensor determines that it  
is nighttime if the surrounding area is  
continuously dark for several minutes such  
as inside long tunnels, traffic jams inside  
tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.  
Ø Do not shade the light sensor by  
adhering a sticker or a label on  
the windshield. Otherwise the light  
sensor will not operate correctly.  
In this case, the light turns off if the light  
switch is turned to the OFF position.  
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO  
position and the ignition switch is turned to  
the ACC or LOCK position, the headlights,  
other exterior lights and dashboard  
illumination will turn off.  
l
Light sensor  
l
The timing for turning on the headlights,  
other exterior lights and dashboard  
illumination can be delayed by adjusting  
the sensitivity of the light sensor. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding sensor  
adjustment.  
Ø The light sensor also works as a  
rain sensor for the auto-wiper  
control. Keep hands and scrapers  
clear of the windshield when the  
ignition switch is in the ON  
position as fingers could be  
pinched or the wipers and wiper  
blades damaged when the wipers  
activate automatically. If you are  
going to clean the windshield, be  
sure the wipers are turned off  
completely - this is particularly  
important when clearing ice and  
snow - when it is particularly  
tempting to leave the engine  
running.  
l
The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be  
changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Xenon fusion headlight bulbsí  
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights  
have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a  
bright white beam over a wide area.  
WARNING  
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself:  
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself is dangerous. Because the  
xenon fusion bulbs require high  
voltage, you could receive an electric  
shock if the bulbs are handled  
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer when the replacement  
is necessary.  
5-52  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
qFlashing the Headlights  
If the headlights flicker, or the brightness  
weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a  
replacement is necessary. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully  
toward you. The headlight switch does  
not need to be on, and the lever will return  
to the normal position when released.  
qLights-On Reminder  
If lights are on and the key is removed  
from the ignition switch, a continuous  
beep sound will be heard when the  
driver's door is opened.  
qHeadlight High-Low Beam  
Push the lever forward for high beam.  
Pull back to original position for low  
beam.  
qHeadlight Levelingí  
High beam  
The number of passengers and weight of  
cargo in the luggage compartment change  
the angle of the headlights.  
Low beam  
The headlight leveling switch adjusts this  
angle.  
Select the proper setting from the  
following chart.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-53  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Without turbocharger  
Turn and Lane-Change  
Signals  
Front seat  
Rear  
seat  
Switch  
Position  
Load  
Driver Passenger  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
0
0
1
2
3
qTurn Signal  
Move the signal lever down (for a left  
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop  
position. The signal will self-cancel after  
the turn is completed.  
×
×
×
×
×: Yes  
: No  
If the indicator light continues to flash  
after a turn, manually return the lever to  
its original position.  
With turbocharger  
Front seat  
Rear  
seat  
Switch  
Position  
Load  
Driver Passenger  
Right turn  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
0
0
1
1
2
Right lane  
change  
×
×
×
OFF  
×
×: Yes  
: No  
Left lane  
change  
q
Daytime Running Lights (Canada)  
Left turn  
In Canada, vehicles must be driven with  
the headlights on during daytime  
operation.  
Green indicators on the dashboard show  
which signal is working.  
Lane-change signals  
For that reason, the daytime running lights  
automatically turn on when the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON position.  
Move the lever slightly toward the  
direction of the change until the  
indicator flashesand hold it there. It  
will return to the off position when  
released.  
NOTE  
The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the  
parking brake is applied.  
NOTE  
If an indicator light stays on without flashing  
or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn  
signal bulbs may be burned out.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Fog Lightsí  
Windshield Wipers and  
Washer  
The front fog lights help you to see as  
well as to be seen.  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position.  
The headlights must be turned on to turn  
on the front fog lights.  
WARNING  
Use only windshield washer fluid or  
plain water in the reservoir:  
To turn the front fog lights on, rotate the  
fog light switch to the  
position.  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer  
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the  
windshield, it will dirty the  
windshield, affect your visibility, and  
could result in an accident.  
Only use windshield washer fluid  
mixed with anti-freeze protection in  
freezing weather conditions:  
Using windshield washer fluid  
without anti-freeze protection in  
freezing weather conditions is  
dangerous as it could freeze on the  
windshield and block your vision  
which could cause an accident.  
In addition, make sure the  
Fog light switch  
To turn the front fog lights off, rotate the  
fog light switch to the OFF position or  
turn the headlights off.  
windshield is sufficiently warmed  
using the defroster before spraying  
the washer fluid.  
NOTE  
l
The fog lights will turn off when the  
headlights are set at high beam.  
l
(With auto-light control)  
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO  
position, the front fog lights can be turned  
on when the headlights, the exterior lights  
and dashboard illumination are on.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-55  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
Variable-speed intermittent wipersí  
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper  
blades, the wiper motor is protected from  
motor breakdown, overheating and possible  
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will  
automatically stop operation of the blades, but  
only for about 5 minutes.  
Set the lever to INT and choose the  
interval timing by rotating the ring.  
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and  
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow  
and ice.  
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the  
blades should operate normally. If they do not  
resume functioning, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to  
the side of the road and park off the right-of-  
way. Wait until the weather clears before trying  
to drive with the wipers inoperative.  
INT ring  
Type B (With AUTO position)  
qWindshield Wipers  
Type A (With INT position)  
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever  
down.  
AUTO Auto control  
LO Low speed  
HI High speed  
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever  
down.  
INT Intermittent  
LO Low speed  
HI High speed  
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever  
up to MIST.  
MIST Mist  
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever  
up to MIST.  
MIST Mist  
5-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
AUTO (Auto-wiper control)  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, the rain sensor senses the  
amount of rainfall on the windshield and  
turns the wiper on or off automatically  
(offintermittentlow speedhigh  
speed).  
CAUTION  
Ø Do not shade the rain sensor by  
adhering a sticker or a label on  
the windshield. Otherwise the rain  
sensor will not operate correctly.  
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be  
adjusted by turning the switch on the  
wiper lever.  
Rain sensor  
From the center position (normal), turn  
the switch towards (+) for higher  
sensitivity (faster response) or turn the  
_
switch towards ( ) for less sensitivity  
(slower response).  
Less sensitivity  
Switch  
Center  
position  
Higher sensitivity  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Ø When the wiper lever is in the  
AUTO position and the ignition  
switch is in the ON position, the  
wipers may move automatically in  
the following cases:  
NOTE  
l
Switching the auto-wiper lever from the  
OFF to the AUTO position while driving at  
a vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 mph) or higher  
(or after driving the vehicle) activates the  
windshield wipers once, after which they  
operate according to the rainfall amount.  
The auto-wiper control may not operate  
when the rain sensor temperature is about  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is touched.  
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is wiped with a cloth.  
If the windshield is struck with  
a hand or other object.  
If the rain sensor is struck with  
a hand or other object from  
inside the vehicle.  
l
l
_
10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about 85 °C  
(185 °F) or higher.  
If the windshield is coated with water  
repellent, the rain sensor may not be able to  
sense the amount of rainfall correctly and  
auto-wiper control may not operate  
properly.  
Keep hands and scrapers clear of  
the windshield when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position as  
fingers could be pinched or the  
wipers and wiper blades damaged  
when they activate automatically.  
If you are going to clean the  
windshield, be sure the wipers are  
turned off completely - this is  
particularly important when  
clearing ice and snow - when it is  
particularly tempting to leave the  
engine running.  
l
If dirt or foreign matter (e.g. ice or matter  
containing salt water) adheres to the  
windshield above the rain sensor or if the  
windshield is iced, it could cause the wipers  
to move automatically. However, if the  
wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or  
foreign matter, the auto-wiper control will  
stop operation. In this case, pull the wiper  
lever to the low speed or high speed  
position for manual operation, or remove  
the ice, dirt or foreign matter by hand to  
restore the auto-wiper operation.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
qWindshield Washer  
Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer (5 Door)  
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to  
spray washer fluid.  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position.  
OFF  
qRear Window Wiper  
Washer  
NOTE  
With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT (Type  
A)/AUTO (Type B) position, the wipers will  
operate continuously until the lever is  
released.  
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear  
wiper/washer switch.  
ON Normal  
If the washer does not work, inspect the  
fluid level (page 8-27). If it's normal,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
INT Intermittent  
qRear Window Washer  
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/  
washer switch to the  
position. After  
the switch is released, the washer will  
stop.  
If the washer doesn't work, inspect the  
fluid level (page 8-27). If it's OK and the  
washer still doesn't work, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Fully Automatic Type Air-Conditioning  
Rear Window Defroster  
Indicator light  
The rear window defroster clears frost,  
fog, and thin ice from the rear window.  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position.  
Press the switch to turn on the rear  
window defroster. The rear window  
defroster operates for about 1015  
minutes and turns off automatically.  
The indicator light illuminates during  
operation.  
CAUTION  
To turn off the rear window defroster  
before the 1015 minutes has elapsed,  
press the switch again.  
Do not use sharp instruments or  
window cleaners with abrasives to  
clean the inside of the rear window  
surface. They may damage the  
defroster grid inside the window.  
Manual Type Air-Conditioning  
NOTE  
Indicator light  
This defroster is not designed for melting snow.  
If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear  
window, remove it before using the defroster.  
qMirror Defrosterí  
To turn on the mirror defrosters, turn the  
ignition switch to the ON position and  
press the rear window defroster switch  
(page 5-60).  
5-60  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Horn  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
To sound the horn, press the  
the steering wheel.  
mark on  
The hazard warning lights should always  
be used when you stop on or near a  
roadway in an emergency.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard  
and that they must take extreme caution  
when near it.  
Hazard warning flasher  
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all  
the turn signals will flash.  
NOTE  
l
The turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning lights are on.  
l
Check local regulations about the use of  
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is  
being towed to verify that it is not in  
violation of the law.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
6
system.  
Climate Control System ............................................................... 6-2  
Operating Tips ........................................................................... 6-2  
Vent Operation .......................................................................... 6-3  
Types of the Climate Control Systemí ..................................... 6-5  
Manual Typeí .......................................................................... 6-6  
Fully Automatic Typeí ........................................................... 6-11  
Antenna ................................................................................... 6-16  
Audio Control Switch Operation (Steering Wheel)í ............. 6-56  
Interior Lights ......................................................................... 6-62  
Information Display ................................................................ 6-65  
Lighter ..................................................................................... 6-70  
Ashtray .................................................................................... 6-70  
Cup Holder .............................................................................. 6-71  
Bottle Holder ........................................................................... 6-72  
Storage Compartments ............................................................ 6-72  
Accessory Sockets .................................................................. 6-76  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qParking in Direct Sunlight  
Operating Tips  
If the vehicle has been parked in direct  
sunlight during hot weather, open the  
windows to let warm air escape, then run  
the climate control system.  
qOperating the Climate Control  
System  
Operate the climate control system with  
the engine running.  
qNot Using for a Long Period  
NOTE  
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes  
at least once a month to keep internal  
parts lubricated.  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the fan control dial on for a long  
period of time with the ignition switch in the  
ON position when the engine is not running.  
qCheck the Refrigerant before the  
Weather Gets Hot  
qClearing the Air Inlet  
Have the air conditioner checked before  
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant  
may make the air conditioner less  
efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for refrigerant inspection.  
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,  
snow and ice from the hood and the air  
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the  
system efficiency.  
qFoggy Windows  
The air conditioner is filled with  
HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will  
not damage the ozone layer.  
If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant  
or has a malfunction, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The windows may fog up easily in humid  
weather. Use the climate control system to  
defog the windows.  
To help defog the windows, operate the  
air conditioner to dehumidify the air.  
qReplacement of the Cabin Air  
NOTE  
Filterí  
The air conditioner may be used along with the  
heater to dehumidify the air.  
If your vehicle is equipped with an air  
filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary  
to change the filter periodically as  
indicated in scheduled maintenance (page  
8-3). Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for replacement of the cabin air  
filter.  
qOutside/Recirculated Air Position  
Use the outside air position in normal  
conditions. The recirculated air position  
should be used only when driving on  
dusty roads or for quick cooling of the  
interior.  
6-2  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Vent Operation  
Center vents  
Side vents  
Center Vents  
qAdjusting the Vents  
Directing airflow  
Side Vents  
To adjust the direction of airflow, move  
the adjustment knob.  
To adjust the direction of airflow, open the  
vents and rotate them left and right.  
Knob  
Push  
NOTE  
When using the air conditioner under humid  
ambient temperature conditions, the system  
may blow condensed air (fog) from the vents.  
This is not a sign of trouble but a result of  
humid air being suddenly cooled.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qSelecting the Airflow Mode  
Dashboard Vents  
Defroster and Floor Vents  
Dashboard and Floor Vents  
Defroster Vents  
Floor Vents  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Manual type and fully automatic type climate control systems are explained separately.  
Check your vehicle's climate control type and read the appropriate pages.  
Manual Type ............................................................................................................ page 6-6  
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................................................. page 6-11  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Manual Typeí  
Temperature control dial  
Mode selector dial  
Fan control dial  
Air intake selector  
A/C switch  
Some models.  
Fan control dial  
qControl Switches  
Temperature control dial  
Cold  
Hot  
This dial allows variable fan speeds.  
0Fan off  
1Low speed  
2Medium low speed  
3Medium high speed  
4High speed  
This dial controls temperature. Turn it  
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise  
for cold.  
6-6  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Mode selector dial  
NOTE  
l
The air conditioner may not function when  
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C  
(32 °F).  
l
(U.S.A., Canada)  
When the mode is set to  
or  
with the  
fan control dial in a position other than 0  
and the temperature control dial in the  
maximum cold position, the air intake  
selector switches to the recirculated air  
mode and the A/C turns on automatically.  
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch  
to turn it off.  
If recirculated air mode is not desired,  
press the air intake selector to switch to  
outside air mode.  
Turn the mode selector dial to select  
airflow mode (page 6-4).  
NOTE  
l
The mode selector dial can be set at the  
intermediate positions ( ) between each  
mode. Set the dial to a intermediate  
position if you want to slightly adjust the  
airflow amount.  
Air intake selector  
l
For example, when the mode selector dial is  
at the  
position between the  
and  
positions, airflow from the floor vent is less  
than that of the  
position.  
í
A/C switch  
This switch controls the source of air  
entering the vehicle.  
Press the  
switch to alternate  
between the outside air and recirculated  
air modes.  
Press the A/C switch to turn the air  
conditioner on. The indicator light on the  
switch will illuminate when the fan  
control dial is set at position 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
It is recommended that under normal  
conditions the switch be kept in the  
outside air mode.  
Outside air mode (indicator light  
turned off)  
Press the switch once again to turn the air  
conditioner off.  
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use  
this mode for normal ventilation and  
heating.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Recirculated air mode (indicator light  
illuminated)  
NOTE  
l
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the  
mode selector dial to the  
If cooler air is desired at face level, set the  
mode selector dial at the  
adjust the temperature control dial to  
maintain maximum comfort.  
The air to the floor is warmer than air to  
the face (except when the temperature  
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold  
position).  
position.  
Outside air is shut off. Air within the  
vehicle is recirculated.  
l
l
l
position and  
This mode can be used when driving on a  
dusty road or in similar conditions. It also  
helps to provide quicker cooling of the  
interior.  
WARNING  
Do not use the recirculated air mode in  
cold or rainy weather:  
In the  
,
, or  
position, the air  
conditioner is automatically turned on  
(however, the indicator light does not  
illuminate) and the outside air mode is  
automatically selected to defrost the  
windshield.  
Using the recirculated air mode in  
cold or rainy weather is dangerous as  
it will cause the windows to fog up.  
Your vision will be hampered, which  
could lead to a serious accident.  
In the  
or  
position, the outside air  
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated  
air mode.  
qHeating  
qCooling (With Air Conditioner)  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
hot position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
cold position.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing  
the A/C switch.  
5. Adjust the fan control dial and  
temperature control dial to maintain  
maximum comfort.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging  
CAUTION  
When using the air conditioner while  
driving up long hills or in heavy  
traffic, closely monitor the  
temperature gauge (page 5-35).  
The air conditioner may cause engine  
overheating. If the gauge indicates  
overheating, turn the air conditioner  
off (page 7-14).  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Do not defog the windshield using the  
position with the temperature  
control set to the cold position:  
l
When maximum cooling is desired, set the  
temperature control dial to the extreme cold  
position and set the air intake selector to  
the recirculated air mode, then set the fan  
control dial to position 4.  
Using the  
position with the  
temperature control set to the cold  
position is dangerous as it will cause  
the outside of the windshield to fog  
up. Your vision will be hampered,  
which could lead to a serious  
l
l
If warmer air is desired at floor level, set  
the mode selector dial at the  
position  
and adjust the temperature control dial to  
maintain maximum comfort.  
The air to the floor is warmer than air to  
the face (except when the temperature  
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold  
position).  
accident. Set the temperature control  
to the hot or warm position when  
using the  
position.  
NOTE  
l
For maximum defrosting, set the  
temperature control dial to the extreme hot  
position and the fan control dial to position  
4.  
qVentilation  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
l
l
If warm air is desired at the floor, set the  
mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside  
air mode.  
In the , or position, the air  
,
conditioner is automatically turned on  
(however, the indicator light does not  
illuminate) and the outside air mode is  
automatically selected to defrost the  
windshield.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
In the  
or  
position, the outside air  
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated  
air mode.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qDehumidifying (With Air  
Conditioner)  
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold  
weather to help defog the windshield and  
side windows.  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
desired position.  
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside  
air mode.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing  
the A/C switch.  
NOTE  
One of the functions of the air conditioner is  
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,  
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.  
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to  
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on  
the air conditioner when you want to  
dehumidify the cabin air.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Fully Automatic Typeí  
Climate control information is displayed on the information display.  
Mode selector switch  
Temperature control dial  
Fan control dial  
Windshield  
defroster switch  
OFF switch  
Auto switch  
AMB (Ambient  
Temperature) switch  
A/C switch  
Air intake selector  
l
l
Outside/Recirculated air selection  
Air conditioner operation  
qControl Switches  
AUTO switch  
NOTE  
AUTO switch indicator light  
l
When on, it indicates AUTO operation, and  
the system will function automatically.  
l
When off, it indicates the operation of other  
switches such as the mode selector switch,  
fan control dial, A/C switch and windshield  
defroster switch. Other functions will  
continue to operate automatically.  
By pressing the AUTO switch the  
following functions will be automatically  
controlled in accordance with the selected  
set temperature:  
l
Airflow temperature  
Amount of airflow  
Selection of airflow mode  
l
l
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
 
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
OFF switch  
Mode selector switch  
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the  
climate control system.  
The desired airflow mode can be selected  
(page 6-4).  
NOTE  
Temperature control dial  
With the airflow mode set to  
position and  
the temperature control dial set at a medium  
temperature, heated air is directed to the feet  
and a comparably lower air temperature will  
flow through the central, left and right vents.  
Cold  
Hot  
A/C switch  
This dial controls temperature.Turn it  
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise  
for cold.  
Fan control dial  
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO  
switch is turned on will turn off the air  
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying  
functions). The air conditioning can be  
turned on and off by pressing the A/C  
switch while the fan control dial is on.  
Fast  
Slow  
NOTE  
The fan has seven speeds. The selected  
speed will be displayed.  
The air conditioner may not function when the  
outside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).  
(Indicator remains on even when system is off.)  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Air intake selector  
AMB (Ambient Temperature) switch  
Outside or recirculated air positions can  
be selected. Press the switch to select  
outside/recirculated air positions.  
Press the AMB switch to display the  
ambient temperature.  
NOTE  
l
The displayed ambient temperature may  
Recirculated air position (indicator  
light illuminated)  
vary from the actual ambient temperature  
depending on the surrounding area and  
vehicle conditions.  
Use this position when going through  
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high  
engine exhaust areas), high ambient  
humidity conditions, or when quick  
cooling is desired.  
l
Press the AMB switch again to switch the  
display from ambient temperature to the  
temperature set for the air conditioner.  
Windshield defroster switch  
Outside air position (indicator light  
turned off)  
Use this position for normal conditions  
and defogging.  
WARNING  
Do not use the  
rainy weather:  
Using the  
position in cold or  
position in cold or  
rainy weather is dangerous as it will  
cause the windows to fog up. Your  
vision will be hampered, which could  
lead to a serious accident.  
Press the switch to defrost the windshield  
and front door windows.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qOperation of Automatic Air  
qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging  
Conditioning  
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of  
the airflow mode, air intake selector  
and amount of airflow will be  
automatically controlled.  
Press the windshield defroster switch.  
In this position, the outside air position is  
automatically selected, and the air  
conditioner automatically turns on. The  
air conditioner will directly dehumidify  
the air to the front windshield and side  
windows (page 6-4). Airflow amount will  
be increased.  
2. Use the temperature control dial to  
select a desired temperature.  
WARNING  
Cold  
Hot  
Set the temperature control to the hot  
or warm position when defogging (  
position):  
Using the  
position with the  
To turn off the system, press the OFF  
switch.  
temperature control set to the cold  
position is dangerous as it will cause  
the outside of the windshield to fog  
up. Your vision will be hampered,  
which could lead to a serious  
accident.  
NOTE  
l
Setting the temperature to maximum high  
or low will not provide the desired  
temperature at a faster rate.  
l
When selecting heat, the system will restrict  
airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold  
air from blowing out of the vents.  
NOTE  
Use the temperature control dial to increase  
the air flow temperature and defog the  
windshield more quickly.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor  
The fully automatic air conditioner  
function measures inside and outside  
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets  
temperatures inside the passenger  
compartment accordingly.  
CAUTION  
Do not obstruct either sensor,  
otherwise the automatic air  
conditioner will not operate properly.  
Sunlight sensor  
Interior temperature sensor  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
Antenna  
When leaving your vehicle unattended, we  
recommend that you remove the antenna and  
store it inside the vehicle.  
qDetachable Type  
To remove the antenna, turn it  
counterclockwise.  
To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.  
Make sure the antenna is securely  
installed.  
Type A  
Install  
Remove  
Type B  
Install  
Remove  
CAUTION  
Ø To prevent damage to the  
antenna, remove it before entering  
a car wash facility or passing  
beneath a low overhead clearance.  
Ø Be careful around the antenna  
when removing snow from the  
roof. Otherwise the antenna could  
be damaged.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qRadio Reception  
Operating Tips for Audio  
System  
AM characteristics  
AM signals bend around such things as  
buildings or mountains and bounce off the  
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach  
longer distances than FM signals. Because  
of this, two stations may sometimes be  
picked up on the same frequency at the  
same time.  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the audio control  
switches while driving the vehicle:  
Adjusting the audio while driving the  
vehicle is dangerous as it could  
distract your attention from the  
vehicle operation which could lead to  
a serious accident. Always adjust the  
audio while the vehicle is stopped.  
Even if the audio control switches are  
equipped on the steering wheel, learn  
to use the switches without looking  
down at them so that you can keep  
your maximum attention on the road  
while driving the vehicle.  
Ionosphere  
Station 1  
Station 2  
FM characteristics  
An FM broadcast range is usually about  
4050 km (2530 miles) from the  
source. Because of extra coding needed to  
break the sound into two channels, stereo  
FM has even less range than monaural  
(non-stereo) FM.  
CAUTION  
For the purposes of safe driving,  
adjust the audio volume to a level  
that allows you to hear sounds  
outside of the vehicle including car  
horns and particularly emergency  
vehicle sirens.  
FM Station  
NOTE  
l
To prevent the battery from being  
40—50km  
(25—30 miles)  
discharged, do not leave the audio system  
on for a long period of time when the  
engine is not running.  
l
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in  
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to  
occur from the audio system, however, this  
does not indicate that the system has been  
damaged.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar  
to beams of light because they do not  
bend around corners, but they do reflect.  
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot  
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM  
stations cannot be received at the great  
distances possible with AM reception.  
Flutter/Skip noise  
Signals from an FM transmitter move in  
straight lines and become weak in valleys  
between tall buildings, mountains, and  
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes  
through such an area, the reception  
conditions may change suddenly, resulting  
in annoying noise.  
Ionosphere  
FM wave  
AM wave  
FM wave  
100—200 km (60—120 miles)  
Atmospheric conditions can also affect  
FM reception. High humidity will cause  
poor reception. However, cloudy days  
may provide better reception than clear  
days.  
Weak signal noise  
In suburban areas, broadcast signals  
become weak because of distance from  
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe  
areas is characterized by sound breakup.  
Multipath noise  
Since FM signals can be reflected by  
obstructions, it is possible to receive both  
the direct signal and the reflected signal at  
the same time. This causes a slight delay  
in reception and may be heard as a broken  
sound or a distortion. This problem may  
also be encountered when in close  
proximity to the transmitter.  
Reflected wave  
Direct  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Strong signal noise  
qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-  
Dash CD Changer  
This occurs very close to a transmitter  
tower. The broadcast signals are  
extremely strong, so the result is noise and  
sound breakup at the radio receiver.  
Condensation phenomenon  
Immediately after turning on the heater  
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or  
optical components (prism and lens) in the  
CD player/In-dash CD changer may  
become clouded with condensation. At  
this time, the CD will eject immediately  
when placed in the unit. A clouded CD  
can be corrected simply by wiping it with  
a soft cloth. Clouded optical components  
will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait  
for normal operation to return before  
attempting to use the unit.  
Station drift noise  
When a vehicle reaches the area of two  
strong stations broadcasting at similar  
frequencies, the original station may be  
temporarily lost and the second station  
picked up. At this time there will be some  
noise from this disturbance.  
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD  
changer  
The following precautions should be  
observed.  
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio  
system.  
Station 2  
88.3 MHz  
Station 1  
88.1 MHz  
l
Do not insert any objects, other than  
CDs, into the slot.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
The CD revolves at high speed within  
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly  
bent) CDs should never be used.  
A new CD may have rough edges on  
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc  
with rough edges is used, proper  
setting will not be possible and the CD  
player/In-dash CD changer will not  
play the CD. In addition, the disc may  
not eject resulting in a malfunction.  
Remove the rough edges in advance by  
using a ball-point pen or pencil as  
shown below. To remove the rough  
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil  
against the inner and outer perimeter of  
the CD.  
l
Do not use non-conventional discs  
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,  
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in  
a malfunction.  
l
When driving over uneven surfaces,  
the sound may jump.  
l
If the memory portion of the CD is  
transparent or translucent, do not use  
the disc.  
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer has  
been designed to play CDs bearing the  
identification logo as shown. No other  
discs can be played.  
Transparent  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
l
Use discs that have been legitimately  
produced. If illegally-copied discs such  
as pirated discs are used, the system  
may not operate properly.  
Insert discs one by one. If two discs are  
inserted at the same time, the system  
may not operate properly.  
CD TEXT textual information cannot  
be displayed by audio units other than  
the CD player/In-dash CD changer.  
(Only playback is possible.)  
The following player can play MP3  
files recorded in CD-ROM, CD-R, and  
CD-RW.  
l
· CD player  
· In-dash CD changer  
l
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer  
ejects the CD if the CD is inserted  
upside down. Also dirty and/or  
defective CDs may be ejected.  
An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the  
CD player.  
l
Be sure never to touch the signal  
surface when handling the CDs. Pick  
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or  
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.  
The In-dash CD changer is specially  
made for 12 cm (5 in) CDs.  
An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the  
In-dash CD changer if an 8 cm (3 in)  
CD adapter is used.  
If an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is not  
used, the In-dash CD changer may be  
damaged. Always use a CD adapter.  
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD  
player/In-dash CD changer.  
l
l
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.  
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the  
side without a label). The disc may not  
eject resulting in a malfunction.  
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can  
decrease the amount of light reflected  
from the signal surface, thus affecting  
sound quality. If the CD should  
become soiled, gently wipe it with a  
soft cloth from the center of the CD to  
the edge.  
Do not use record sprays, antistatic  
agents, or household spray cleaners.  
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and  
thinner can also damage the surface of  
the CD and must not be used. Anything  
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic  
should never be used to clean CDs.  
l
l
l
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off  
seal affixed to it.  
This unit may not be able to play  
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a  
computer or music CD recorder due to  
disc characteristics, scratches,  
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or  
condensation on the lens inside the  
unit.  
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to  
direct sunlight or high temperature may  
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make  
them unplayable.  
l
l
l
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB  
cannot be played.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
This unit may not be able to play  
This audio system handles MP3 files  
that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-  
RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been  
recorded using the following formats  
can be played:  
certain discs made using a computer  
due to the application (writing  
software) setting used. (For details,  
consult the store where the application  
was purchased.)  
l
ISO 9660 level 1  
ISO 9660 level 2  
Joliet extended format  
Romeo extended format  
l
l
It is possible that certain text data, such  
l
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW  
may not be displayed when musical  
data (CD-DA) is playing.  
The period from when a CD-RW is  
inserted to when it begins playing is  
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.  
Completely read the instruction manual  
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.  
Do not use discs with cellophane tape  
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or  
adhesive material exuding from the  
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use  
discs with a commercially-available  
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not  
eject resulting in a malfunction.  
l
l
This unit handles MP3 files  
l
conforming to the MP3 format  
containing both header frames and data  
frames.  
This unit can play multi-session  
recorded discs that have up to 40  
sessions.  
This unit can play MP3s with sampling  
frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48  
kHz.  
This unit can play MP3 files that have  
been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to  
320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure  
enjoyment of music with consistent  
sound quality, it is recommended to use  
discs that have been recorded at a bit  
rate of 128 kbps or more.  
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)  
and MP3 files, playback of the two file  
types differs depending on how the  
disc was recorded.  
Packet written discs cannot be played  
on this unit.  
This unit does not play CDs recorded  
using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3  
PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.  
l
l
l
l
l
qOperating tips for MP3  
NOTE  
Supply of this product only conveys a license  
for private, non-commercial use and does not  
convey a license nor imply any right to use this  
product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-  
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,  
satellite, cable and/or any other media),  
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such as  
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.  
An independent license for such use is  
required. For details, please visit  
l
l
l
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
l
About folders and files  
The folder order is automatically  
assigned and this order cannot be  
optionally set.  
l
The order of hierarchy for MP3 files  
and folders during playback or other  
functions is from shallow to deep. The  
arrangement and playing order of a  
recorded disc containing MP3 files is  
as follows:  
Any folder without an MP3 file will be  
ignored. (It will be skipped and the  
folder number will not be displayed.)  
MP3 files not conforming to the MP3  
format containing both header frames  
and data frames will be skipped and  
not played.  
This unit will play MP3 files that have  
up to eight levels. However, the more  
levels a disc has, the longer it will take  
to initially start playing. It is  
recommended to record discs with two  
levels or less.  
A single disc with up to 512 files can  
be played and a single folder with up to  
255 files can be played.  
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to  
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after  
the file name.  
The maximum number of characters  
that can be used for file names is as  
follows. However, this unit will only  
display up to 30 characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3).  
l
File number  
A numerical file number is assigned  
to each file in a folder in the order of  
hierarchy from shallow to deep.  
l
l
Folder number  
A numerical folder number is  
assigned to each folder in the order  
of hierarchy from shallow to deep.  
NOTE  
l
l
l
Folders and tracks (files) within the same  
hierarchy play in the order they were written to  
the disc depending on the write software.  
: Folder : Track (File)  
Folder  
No.  
01  
02  
04  
3
Maximum number of  
characters in a file name  
(including a separator .”  
and the three letters of the  
file extension)  
03  
2
05  
ISO9660 level 1  
ISO9660 level 2  
12*  
31*  
4
Joliet extended  
format  
06  
64  
5
1
Romeo extended  
format  
128  
* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and  
underbar _are available.  
Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Multi-session  
CAUTION  
A session is the complete amount of data  
recorded from the beginning to the end of  
a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-  
RW data recording. Multi-session refers to  
the existence of data from two or more  
sessions on a single disc.  
This unit can only play MP3 files that  
have an MP3 file extension (.mp3)  
attached. Do not attach an MP3 file  
extension to any other type file as it  
could cause noise to be emitted or a  
malfunction in the unit.  
Sampling  
About ID3 Tag display  
Refers to the process of encoding analog  
audio data at regular intervals and  
converting it to digital data. The sampling  
rate refers to the number of times a  
sample is taken in one second and is  
expressed in Hz units. Increasing the  
sampling rate improves the sound quality  
but also increases the data size.  
l
This unit can only display ID3 Tag  
album, track and artist names that have  
been input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3  
formats. Any other data that may have  
been input cannot be displayed.  
l
This unit can only display English  
(including numerals) one-byte  
characters. Use only English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters when  
inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters  
and some special symbols cannot be  
displayed.  
Bit rate  
Refers to the volume of data per second,  
expressed in bps (bits per second).  
Generally, the larger the number of the  
transfer bit rate when compressing an  
MP3 file, the more information regarding  
musical reproduction it carries, and  
therefore the better the sound quality.  
Specialized glossary  
MP3  
Abbreviation for MPEG Audio Layer 3.  
A technical standard for audio  
Packet writing  
compression as decided by an ISO  
(International Organization for  
Standardization) MPEG working group.  
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be  
compressed to approximately a tenth of  
the source data size.  
A general term for the method, similar to  
that used for floppy discs or hard drives,  
of recording the required file in a single  
increment on a CD-R and similar.  
ID3 Tag  
ID3 tag is a method for storing  
ISO 9660  
information related to the music in an  
MP3 file. Information such as track, artist  
and album name can be stored. This  
content can be freely edited using ID3  
editing function software.  
An international standard for logical  
formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.  
It is divided into three separate levels  
based on differences in file naming  
procedures, data configuration and other  
characteristics.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
VBR  
Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While  
CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally  
used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio  
compression according to compression  
conditions and this allows for  
compression with preference given to  
sound quality.  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Audio Set  
Audio information is displayed on the information display.  
CD Player  
In-dash CD Changer  
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .............................................................. page 6-46  
Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ....................................................................... page 6-50  
Operating the Auxiliary jack .................................................................................. page 6-54  
Error Indications ..................................................................................................... page 6-55  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls  
Power/Volume dial Audio control dial  
Power ON/OFF  
Audio sound adjustment  
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or  
ON position.  
1. Press the audio control dial to select the  
function. The selected function will be  
indicated.  
Press the power/volume dial to turn the  
audio system on.  
Press the power/volume dial again to turn  
the audio system off.  
NOTE  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the audio system on for a long  
period of time when the engine is not running.  
Volume adjustment  
Depending on the mode selected, the  
indication changes.  
To adjust the volume, turn the power/  
volume dial.  
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to  
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the  
selected functions as follows:  
Select the desired ALC mode.  
Mode  
Volume change  
Indication  
Turn Left Turn Right  
No change  
Select mode  
Minimum  
Medium  
Decrease  
bass  
Increase  
bass  
Decrease  
treble  
Increase  
treble  
Maximum  
Shift the  
Shift the  
sound to the sound to the  
Turn the audio control dial to select ALC  
OFF or ALC LEVEL13 modes. The  
selected mode will be indicated.  
front  
rear  
Shift the  
Shift the  
sound to the sound to the  
left  
right  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
12Hr  
24Hr  
(Flashing) (Flashing)  
NOTE  
About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the  
volume function will be automatically selected.  
To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press  
the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit  
will beep and CLEARwill be displayed.  
BEEP setting  
The beep-sound when operating the audio  
system can be set on or off.  
Automatic Level Control (ALC)  
The automatic level control is a feature  
that automatically adjusts audio volume  
and sound quality according to the vehicle  
speed.  
The volume increases in accordance with  
the increase in vehicle speed, and  
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.  
ILLM EFT setting (Illumination setting  
during operation)  
The audio system illumination during  
operation can be set on or off.  
Time adjustment  
Rotating the audio control dial switches  
the display between 12 and 24-hour clock  
time (page 6-66).  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Radio  
Seek tuning buttons  
Band selector buttons  
Scan button  
Channel  
preset  
buttons  
Manual tuning dial/Auto memory button  
Radio ON  
Tuning  
Press a band selector button (  
turn the radio on.  
) to  
The radio has the following tuning  
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset  
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The  
easiest way to tune stations is to set them  
on preset channels.  
Band selection  
Successively pressing the band selector  
button ( ) switches the bands as  
follows: FM1FM2AM.  
NOTE  
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows  
or the battery is disconnected), the preset  
channels will be erased.  
The selected mode will be indicated. If  
FM stereo is being received, STwill be  
displayed.  
Manual tuning  
NOTE  
Turning the manual tuning dial will  
change the frequency higher or lower.  
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,  
reception automatically changes from  
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the  
STindicator will go out.  
Seek tuning  
Pressing the seek tuning button (  
,
)
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or  
lower frequency automatically.  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
Press and hold the auto memory button  
If you continue to press and hold the button,  
the frequency will continue changing without  
stopping.  
(
) for about 2 seconds until a beep  
sound is heard; the system will  
automatically scan and temporarily store  
up to 6 stations with the strongest  
frequencies in each selected band in that  
area.  
Scan tuning  
Press the scan button (  
) to  
automatically sample strong stations.  
Scanning stops at each station for about 5  
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan  
After scanning is completed, the station  
with the strongest frequency will be tuned  
and its frequency displayed.  
button (  
) again during this interval.  
Press and release the auto memory button  
Preset channel tuning  
(
) to recall stations from the auto-  
stored stations. One stored station will be  
selected each time; its frequency and  
channel number will be displayed.  
The 6 preset channels can be used to store  
6 AM and 12 FM stations.  
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,  
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.  
NOTE  
If no stations can be tuned after scanning  
operations, Awill be displayed.  
2. Depress a channel preset button for  
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is  
heard. The preset channel number and  
station frequency will be displayed.  
The station is now held in the memory.  
3. Repeat this operation for the other  
stations and bands you want to store.  
To tune one in the memory, select AM,  
FM1, or FM2 and then press its  
channel preset button. The station  
frequency and the channel number will  
be displayed.  
NOTE  
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows  
or the battery is disconnected), the preset  
channels will be erased.  
Auto memory tuning  
This is especially useful when driving in  
an area where the local stations are not  
known. Additional AM/FM stations can  
be stored without disturbing the  
previously set channels.  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Satellite Radioí  
Seek tuning/Category  
buttons  
Band selector buttons  
Scan button Satellite button  
Channel  
preset  
buttons  
Instant replay button  
Manual tuning dial/Auto memory  
Display feed dial  
button/Electronic serial number button  
Information display  
All operations of the satellite radio are displayed on the Information display.  
Channel number, Channel name, Category name, Artist name, Song title,  
ID code, Preset channel number, Bank number, Error signs  
6-32  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
What is satellite radio?  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, If not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
- Increase the separation between the  
equipment and tuner.  
SIRIUS is radio the way it was meant to  
be: More than 100 new channels of digital  
quality programming delivered to listeners  
coast to coast via satellite. That means  
channels of completely commercial-free  
music plus more channels of news, sports,  
and entertainment from names like  
CNBC, Discovery, SCI-FI Channel, A&E,  
House of Blues, E!, NPR, Speed vision  
and ESPN.  
SIRIUS is live, dynamic entertainment,  
completely focused on listeners. Every  
minute of every day of every week will be  
different. All commercial-free music  
channels are created in-house and hosted  
by DJs who know and love the music. Do  
you like Reggae? How about Classic  
Rock or New Rock? SIRIUS has an array  
of choices spanning a vast range of  
musical tastes including the hits of the  
50's, 60's, 70's, & 80's as well as Jazz,  
Country, Blues, Pop, Rap, R&B,  
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the tuner is  
connected.  
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
TV technician for help.  
Bluegrass, Alternative, Classical, Heavy  
Metal, Dance and many others.  
From its state-of-the-art, digital  
broadcasting facility in Rockefeller  
Center, New York City, SIRIUS will  
deliver the broadest, deepest mix of radio  
entertainment from coast to coast.  
SIRIUS will bring you music and  
entertainment programming that is simply  
not available on traditional radio in any  
market across the country. It's radio like  
you've never heard before.  
Sign up for SIRIUS Radio today! For  
more information, visit siriusradio.com.  
Satellite radio can be subscribed to and  
received in the United States. (Except  
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Selecting SIRIUS radio mode (Satellite  
button)  
4. Hold down a channel preset button for  
1.5 seconds or more, and release when  
the beep is heard.  
When the satellite button is pressed, it will  
play the last selected SIRIUS channel.  
Every time the satellite button is pressed,  
the bank is changed over in the order  
shown below.  
5. The programming process is complete  
after the channel number or text blinks.  
Preset channel call-up (Channel preset  
buttons)  
Press a channel preset button.  
Category change (Category button)  
SR1  
SR2  
SR3  
Press the category button (UP or DOWN)  
and select the desired category.  
l
Press the category button (UP):  
Category up  
Press the category button (DOWN):  
l
Category down  
At this time, the lowest (smallest-number)  
channel within the category indicated is  
received.  
When the highest (or lowest) category is  
reached, the display of the category is  
changed over in the order shown below.  
Highest categoryCategory allLowest  
category  
NOTE  
SR1, SR2 and SR3: six stations can be stored  
in each bank for convenient access to your  
favorite stations.  
Channel selection (Manual tuning dial)  
NOTE  
Turning the manual tuning dial allows you  
to select the desired channel.  
While in CATEGORY ALLmode, all  
channels covering a category can be accessed  
(Category off condition).  
l
Turn the manual tuning dial clockwise:  
Channel Up  
Turn the manual tuning dial  
l
Channel selection within a category  
(Manual tuning dial)  
counterclockwise: Channel Down  
Preset channel programming (Channel  
preset buttons or display button)  
NOTE  
If the category is not in ALL, turning the  
manual tuning dial moves the channel number  
up/down in the present category.  
1. Channels can be programmed with  
either a channel numberor text”  
display.  
l
Turn the knob clockwise: Channel Up  
Turn the knob counterclockwise: Channel  
Down  
l
2. Press the display button to select the  
channel number or desired text (e.g.  
channel name) display mode.  
3. Select the desired channel to be  
programmed.  
6-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
Channel number, channel, category,  
artist, and song title display (Display  
button, display feed dial)  
Subscribing to SIRIUS customer care,  
available 24 hours a day, 7 days a  
week.  
Calling (888) 539-7474  
E-mail at: customercare@sirius-  
radio.com  
Writing to: SATELLITE RADIO  
1221 Avenue of the Americas  
New York, NY 10020  
l
l
Each time the display button is briefly  
pressed during SIRIUS reception, the  
display of the text data changes in the  
order shown below.  
l
Attention: Customer Care  
Customers should have their SIRIUS  
Radio ID Electronic Serial Number  
(ESN#) ready.  
Channel number  
Song title  
Channel name  
Category  
name  
Info  
NOTE  
Your ESN# should have been recorded at the  
time of installation. If not, refer to  
DISPLAYING THE SIRIUS ID (ESN)to  
retrieve your ESN#.  
Artist name  
Satellite radio activation  
NOTE  
For activation and subscription  
information call toll-free at 1-888-539-  
SIRI (7474). A SIRIUS Customer Care  
representative will take the necessary  
information and walk you through the  
activation process. Or you can visit  
SIRIUS online at WWW.siriusradio.com  
and click on the Joinbutton.  
When you call the SIRIUS Customers  
Care number you have two options  
available.  
(1) The full package which allows you  
access to all SIRIUS content except  
pay- per-view.  
(2) The family package which allows  
access to certain channels. Please see  
the website: www.sirius.com for  
details.  
l
Eight characters can be displayed on 1  
screen.  
l
By turning the display feed dial  
counterclockwise, it is possible to display  
the remaining part of the title one character  
at a time each time the dial is rotated one  
increment.  
How to subscribe to satellite radio  
Once the system is installed you must first  
subscribe to the SIRIUS Radio service to  
activate the system.  
The SIRIUS Radio service uses an ID  
code to identify your radio. This code is  
needed to subscribe to SIRIUS Radio, and  
if needed, is also used to report any  
problems should there be any in the  
future. Listeners can subscribe using any  
of the following methods:  
Please have the following information  
ready when attempting to activate your  
service:  
l
Visiting SIRIUS on the web at www.  
sirius.com  
l
SIRIUS ID (ESN*)  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
Valid credit card information (type,  
number, expiration date)  
Every time the satellite button is pressed,  
the bank changes in the order shown  
below.  
When you are ready to receive the on-air  
activation signals you will be instructed  
(for activation via phone) to turn on your  
tuner, have the antenna pointed skyward,  
and to set the channel to channel 184.  
Once the signal is sent from the national  
studio it may take up to 10 minutes to be  
received by your unit.  
SR1  
SR2  
SR3  
NOTE  
On-air activation is completed after the  
procedure, in most cases from 10 seconds to  
10 minutes.  
*ESN: Electronic Serial Number  
NOTE  
SR1, SR2 and SR3: 6 stations can be stored in  
each bank for convenient access to your  
favorite stations.  
SIRIUS operation  
All operations of the satellite radio are  
conducted by means of the audio unit.  
Operation in the initial state  
SIRIUS radio mode selection  
It may take some time to start up the  
equipment when it is in the initial state,  
when there is a change in the user's  
subscription condition, or when the  
SIRIUS channel map is changed.  
When the satellite button is pressed during  
ACC ON, it will play the last SIRIUS  
channel in use before the mode was  
switched over to another mode or the  
power was turned off.  
UPDATING xx%is displayed when the  
SIRIUS channel map is changed. If the  
unit is initialized or the user contract  
content is changed, UPDATINGis  
displayed. Updating could take as long as  
3 minutes depending on the geographical  
area. When the unit is in an initialized  
state, channel 184 is displayed after the  
display indicates UPDATING 100%. If  
the SIRIUS channel map or the user  
contract content is changed, the channel  
prior to the change is displayed after  
UPDATINGis displayed. After the  
initialization display, it may take as long  
as 12 seconds to receive channel 184.  
When the satellite button is pressed in a  
mode other than the SIRIUS mode, the  
last channel in use will be received.  
6-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
When the SIRIUS mode is switched to  
another mode, or when the power is  
turned off, the present channel which is  
being received is stored as the last  
channel.  
Preset channel programming  
(Programming with channel number”  
display)  
1. Press the display button to select the  
channel number display mode.  
Select the desired channel to be  
programmed. At this point, the  
following is displayed:  
Channel selection  
Turning the manual tuning dial allows you  
to select the desired receiving channel.  
l
Turn the knob clockwise: Channel Up  
Turn the knob counterclockwise:  
[SR + (bank number) + (channel  
number)]  
l
Channel Down  
2. Keep pressing the channel preset  
button for 1.5 seconds or more.  
Unsubscribed channel  
The programming process is complete  
after the channel number flashes. Then,  
[SR + (bank number)] is displayed and  
a beep sound is heard at the same time.  
When a selected station has not been  
subscribed to, the display indicates the  
following:  
[CALL + 888] and [539 + SIRI] (Flashes  
alternately)  
3. [SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] are  
displayed.  
NOTE  
When the subscription contract is canceled, all  
of the channels including channel 184 appear  
as unsubscribed.  
(Programming with textdisplay (e.g.  
channel name))  
Invalid channel  
1. Press the display button to select the  
desired text display mode (e.g. channel  
name).  
When a selected channel is not  
broadcasting, [SR + (bank number) +  
INVALID] is displayed for 1 second,  
followed by [SR + (bank number) +  
CHANNEL], which is also displayed for  
1 second. The display then returns to the  
previous valid channel.  
Select the desired channel to be  
programmed. At this point, the  
following is displayed:  
[SR + (bank number) + (selected text  
(e.g. channel name))]  
2. Keep pressing the channel preset  
button for 1.5 seconds or more.  
The programming process is complete  
after the text (e.g. channel name)  
flashes. Then, [SR + (bank number)] is  
displayed and you will hear beep sound  
at the same time.  
NOTE  
If the last channel selected has become  
unavailable because of a channel update the  
above indication is displayed until any button  
is pressed.  
3. SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] are  
displayed.  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
4. Three seconds later, it returns to normal  
display. [SR + (bank number) + (text  
(e.g. channel name))]  
NOTE  
While in CATEGORY ALLmode, all  
channels covering a category can be accessed  
(Category off condition).  
NOTE  
Six stations can be stored in each bank, SR1,  
SR2, and SR3 for convenient access to your  
favorite stations.  
Channel selection within a category  
If category is not in ALLand the  
channel number is displayed, turning the  
manual tuning dial moves the channel  
number up/down in the present category.  
Preset channel call-up  
Press and release the channel preset  
button,  
l
Turn the manual tuning dial clockwise:  
Channel Up  
Turn the manual tuning dial  
[SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] appears.  
When the preset button is pressed during  
text mode, its channel number is  
displayed first for 3 second and then its  
text is displayed.  
l
counterclockwise: Channel Down  
NOTE  
The channel number needs to be indicated in  
the display to use manual tuning dial for this  
function.  
NOTE  
In the initial setting, all channels are preset to  
184.  
Channel number, channel name,  
category, artist, song titles and info  
display  
Category change  
Each time the display button is briefly  
pressed during SIRIUS reception, the  
display of the text data is changed over in  
the order shown below.  
Press the category button (UP or DOWN)  
and select the desired category.  
l
Press the category button (UP):  
Category up  
Press the category button (DOWN):  
l
Category down  
Every time the category (UP) button is  
pressed for 1.5 second or less, the  
category is changed over in the order  
shown below.  
At this time, the lowest (smallest-number)  
channel within the category indicated is  
received.  
Channel number  
Song title  
Channel name  
Category  
name  
Info  
Artist name  
When the highest (or lowest) category is  
reached, the category is changed over in  
the order shown below.  
Highest categoryCategory allLowest  
category  
6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
(Category name display)  
l
l
Eight characters are displayed on 1 screen.  
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in channel name display  
mode, it changes to the category name  
display mode.  
There are short (8 fixed characters) and  
long names for the category name.  
The long name is displayed first, and 3  
seconds later the short name is  
displayed. If there is no short name, the  
long name is displayed.  
l
By turning the display feed dial  
counterclockwise, it is possible to display  
the remaining part of the title one character  
at a time each time the display feed dial is  
rotated one increment counterclockwise.  
l
l
(Channel number display)  
l
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in info display mode, the  
mode changes to the channel number  
display mode.  
l
If there are more than 8 characters in  
the category name, it is possible to  
display the remaining part of the  
category name one character at a time  
each time the display feed dial is  
rotated one increment clockwise.  
While the short name is displayed,  
turning the display feed dial switches  
the display to the long name.  
Three seconds after scrolling the long  
name, the display automatically returns  
to display the first part of the long  
name. Three more seconds and the  
short name appears.  
(Channel name display)  
l
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in channel number  
display mode, it changes to channel  
name display mode.  
l
l
l
There are short (8 fixed characters) and  
long names for the channel name.  
The long name is displayed first, and 3  
l
seconds later the short name is  
displayed. If there is no short name, the  
long name is displayed.  
l
If there are more than 8 characters in  
l
If there is no category name,  
the channel name, it is possible to  
display the remaining part of the  
channel name one character at a time  
each time the display feed dial is  
rotated one increment clockwise.  
While the short name is displayed,  
turning the display feed dial switches  
the display to the long name.  
No CATEGORYis displayed.  
(Artist name display)  
l
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in category name display  
mode, it changes to the artist name  
display mode.  
l
l
If there are more than 8 characters in  
l
Three seconds after scrolling the long  
the artist's name, it is possible to  
display the remaining part of the artist  
name one character at a time each time  
the display feed dial is rotated one  
increment clockwise.  
name, the display automatically returns  
to the first part of the long name. Three  
more seconds and the short name  
appears.  
If there is no channel name,  
No TITLEis displayed.  
l
l
Three seconds after scrolling the artist  
name, the display automatically return  
to display the first part of the artist's  
name.  
6-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
If there is no artist's name,  
No ARTISTis displayed.  
When the category button (DOWN) is  
briefly pressed (about 0.5 seconds),  
playback starts from the beginning of the  
current program.  
When the category button (DOWN) is  
pressed twice, playback starts from the  
beginning of the previous program.  
When the category button (DOWN) is  
pressed for about 0.5 seconds or longer,  
the program is reversed while the button  
is being pressed.  
When the category button (UP) is briefly  
pressed (about 0.5 seconds), playback  
starts from the beginning of the next  
program. When the category button (UP)  
is briefly pressed (about 0.5 seconds)  
while the last program is being played, the  
instant replay mode is cancelled.  
When the category button (UP) is pressed  
for 0.5 seconds or longer, the program is  
fast-forwarded while the button is being  
pressed. When pressing and holding the  
button until the end of the program, the  
instant replay mode is cancelled.  
When the instant replay button is pressed  
again, playback is temporarily stopped, or  
playback starts if it has been temporarily  
stopped.  
(Song title display)  
l
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in artist name display  
mode, it changes to the song title  
display mode.  
l
If there are more than 8 characters in  
the song title, it is possible to display  
the remaining part of the song title one  
character at a time each time the  
display feed dial is rotated one  
increment clockwise.  
l
Three more seconds after scrolling the  
song title, the display automatically  
returns to display the first part of the  
song title.  
If there is no song title, No SONGis  
displayed.  
l
(INFO (such as composer's name)  
display)  
l
When the display button is briefly  
pressed while in song title display  
mode, it changes to the INFO display  
mode.  
l
If there are more than 8 characters in  
the composer's name, it is possible to  
display the remaining part of the name  
one character at a time each time the  
display feed dial is rotated one  
increment clockwise.  
Three seconds after scrolling the text,  
the display automatically returns to  
display the first part of the text.  
Instant replay (PAUSE)  
If the instant replay button is pressed  
while the instant replay mode is off,  
instant replay mode is turned on in a  
paused condition (PAUSE). Press the  
instant replay button again to resume  
playback from the point at which it was  
paused.  
l
l
If there is no composer name,  
No INFOis displayed.  
NOTE  
l
If the channel is changed, the instant replay  
buffer data is deleted.  
After turning on the power and switching to  
Instant replay  
l
This function allows you to rewind and  
replay the program that you were  
previously or are currently listening to.  
Press the instant replay button.  
SIRIUS digital satellite radio mode, the  
instant replay mode is not available for  
several seconds after changing channels.  
6-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(How to cancel the instant replay)  
Initialization of ID code  
l
Turn off the ACC or POWER.  
Press any one of the following buttons:  
If the registered ID code is forgotten,  
return the ID code to the default [0000] by  
performing the following steps:  
l
FM/AM, CD, MEDIA, SAT, SEEK/  
CAT/TRACK, or a channel preset  
button.  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
l
Insert or play a CD.  
(Master code input preparation)  
1. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 4, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
Displaying the SIRIUS ID (ESN)  
When the ESN button is pressed for 1.5  
seconds or longer, a 12-digit Electronic  
Serial Number (ESN) for the SIRIUS  
tuner is displayed.  
2. ENTER PINappears for 2 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
[SR + (bank number) + (first 8 digits of  
SIRIUS ID (ESN))] are displayed.  
The 4 digits following the first 8 digits are  
displayed by turning the display feed dial  
clockwise.  
While the last 4 digits of the 12-digit  
SIRIUS ID (ESN) are displayed, turning  
the display feed dial displays the first 8  
digits of SIRIUS ID (ESN).  
3. SR1 - - - -appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
(Master code input)  
4. Input the master code using the channel  
preset buttons 1-4.  
Press the scan button inputting the  
code.  
(The master code is already set at the  
time of factory shipment.)  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Turn off the ACC.  
Turn off the POWER.  
Press any one of the following buttons:  
(Master code input determination)  
l
5. Determine the master code which has  
been input by pressing the scan button  
briefly.  
l
FM/AM, CD, MEDIA, SAT, ESN/  
DISP, CAT, SCAN, Instant replay, or a  
channel preset button.  
6. PIN CLEAREDappears which  
indicates that the master code input has  
been completed.  
l
Insert or play a CD.  
(If the SIRIUS ID (ESN) for the tuner  
does not display)  
If ESN + FAILis displayed after  
pressing the ESN button for 1.5 seconds  
or longer, contact an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
7. The ID code is set to the default [0000]  
and the initialization process is  
completed.  
6-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
Master code:  
2. ENTER PINappears for 2 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
The Master Code is used to initialize or re-  
initialize the ID code in the event that the code  
is not set to [0000] and/or the personalized ID  
code is not known. The initialization process  
resets the ID code to [0000]. The master code  
can potentially defeat the intent of the security  
of the parental lock if it is located by persons  
not authorized by the owner to access certain  
channels.  
3. SR1 - - - -appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
4. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Then press  
the scan button.  
Example: When the registered ID code  
is 2323, input 2323. At this time  
SR1 2323is displayed.  
Press 1 for the first digit, 2 for the  
second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the  
last digit. For example, if your number  
is 2323, press 1 three times, 2 four  
times, 3 three, and 4 four times. If the  
display goes off while inputting, begin  
from Step 1.  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Master Code: [0913]  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
SAT, CD, MEDIA, CAT, ESN/DISP,  
Instant replay, POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
l
l
Change a channel.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The registered ID code is the default [0000] at  
the time of factory shipment. If [0000] results  
in Erron the display, go to the  
INITIALIZATION OF ID CODEsection to  
reset to [0000].  
l
When a numeric value other than the  
master code is input and the scan button is  
pressed, SR1 Erris displayed and then it  
returns to the SR1 - - - -display again.  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
Erris displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
scan button are used for inputting the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
(Verification with the registered ID  
code)  
l
5. Determine the input code by pressing  
the scan button briefly.  
6. If it does not match with the previously  
registered code, SR1 Erris displayed  
and then it returns to SR1 - - - -.  
Change of ID code  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
When changing the ID code, the new ID  
code is input after the previous one is  
input first.  
7. If it matches with the previously  
registered code, ENTER PINappears  
again and it switches to code input  
mode.  
(Registered ID code input)  
8. SR1 - - - -appears, and it is ready for  
1. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 5, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
input of the new ID code.  
6-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(New ID code input)  
(Locking a channel)  
9. Input the new ID code using channel  
preset buttons 1-4.  
1. Select a channel to be locked by  
pressing the category button. Example:  
Select channel 100  
Example: If 1234is input as the new  
code, SR1 1234is displayed.  
Press the scan button after the code is  
input.  
(Registered ID code input preparation)  
2. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 6, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
(New ID code input determination)  
10. Determine the new ID code which  
has been input by pressing the scan  
button briefly.  
3. ENTER PINappears for 2 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
11. PIN CHANGEDappears for 3  
seconds which indicates that the new  
ID code input has been completed.  
4. SR1 - - - -appears which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
(Registered ID code input)  
12. It returns to the former display.  
5. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example: If  
the registered ID code is 2323, input  
2323. At this time SR1 2323is  
displayed. Press the scan button after  
the code is input.  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
SAT, CD, MEDIA, CAT, ESN/DISP,  
Instant replay, POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
l
l
Change a channel.  
(Registered ID code input  
determination)  
NOTE  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
Erris displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
6. Determine the code which has been  
input by pressing the scan button  
briefly.  
l
7. If it does not match the registered code,  
SR1 Erris displayed and then it  
returns to SR1 - - - -.  
Individual channel locking  
If a channel is locked, the channel is  
muted.  
8. If it matches the registered code,  
SR1 LOCKappears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that the code input has  
been completed.  
NOTE  
If the registered ID code is forgotten, return  
the ID code to the default [0000]. (See  
INTIALIZATION OF ID CODEsection)  
9. SR1 LOCK 100appears which  
indicates that the parental lock is  
activated. At this time, mute is on and  
no sound is heard.  
6-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(How to clear the message)  
NOTE  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
If Erris displayed, go to the  
INITIALIZATION OF ID CODEsection to  
reset the ID code to [0000].  
SAT, CD, MEDIA, CAT, ESN/DISP,  
Instant replay, POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
l
(Registered ID code input  
determination)  
l
Change a channel.  
NOTE  
6. Determine the input code by pressing  
the scan button briefly.  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
Erris displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
7. If it does not match the registered code,  
SR1 Erris displayed and then it  
returns to SR1 - - - -.  
l
8. If it matches the registered code,  
SR1 UNLOCKappears for 3  
seconds which indicates that the code  
input has been completed.  
Lock cancellation  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
(Releasing a locked channel)  
9. SR1 100appears which indicates that  
the parental lock is off. At this time,  
sound is heard.  
1. Select a channel to be released by  
pressing the category button. Example:  
Select the locked channel (i.e. 100). At  
this time, SR1 LOCK 100is  
displayed.  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
SAT, CD, MEDIA, CAT, ESN/DISP,  
Instant replay, POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
(Registered ID code input preparation)  
l
2. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 6, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
l
Change a channel.  
NOTE  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
3. ENTER PINappears for 2 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
Erris displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
l
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
4. SR1 - - - -appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
(Registered ID code input)  
5. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example:  
When the registered ID code is 2323,  
input 2323. At this time SR1 2323”  
is displayed. Press the scan button after  
the code is input.  
6-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Error signs  
(1) Depending on the surrounding  
conditions (such as large trees,  
buildings, or tunnels) and special  
weather conditions, the reception of  
SIRIUS radio waves may be  
decreased or temporarily interrupted.  
ACQUIRING SIGNALmay  
appear.  
(2) In case of an antenna malfunction,  
ANTENNA FAILis displayed.  
Check the satellite radio antenna (type  
B), antenna cable and DLP antenna  
connector.  
NOTE  
If a broken DLP* unit is replaced with a new  
unit, cancel the license for the broken unit and  
make sure to carry out new registration for the  
replaced unit. If the license for the broken unit  
is not canceled, you will be charged a  
reception fee for both units.  
* DLP: Down Link Processor  
(SATELLITE RADIO Module)  
6-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player  
Load button  
Repeat button  
CD play button CD eject button  
CD slot  
Folder up  
button  
Fast-  
forward/Track  
up button  
Folder down  
button  
Reverse/Track  
down button  
Random button  
Scan button  
Display feed dial  
Display button  
Type  
Playable data  
Ejecting the CD  
· Music data (CD-DA)  
· MP3 file  
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the  
CD.  
Music/MP3 CD player  
NOTE  
Playback  
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and  
MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs  
depending on how the disc was recorded.  
Press the CD play button ( ) to start  
play when a CD is in the unit.  
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD  
play button ( ) is pressed, NO DISC”  
will flash on and off.  
Inserting the CD  
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.  
The auto-loading mechanism will set the  
CD and begin play.  
NOTE  
When the load button (  
) is pressed, the  
CD will load and play even if the CD eject  
button ( ) had been previously pressed.  
NOTE  
There will be a short lapse before play begins  
while the player reads the digital signals on  
the CD.  
6-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Fast-forward/Reverse  
During MP3 CD playback  
Press and hold the fast-forward button  
(Track repeat)  
(
) to advance through a track at high  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
speed.  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. RPTis displayed.  
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to  
reverse through a track at high speed.  
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the  
button again after 3 seconds.  
Track search  
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip  
forward to the beginning of the next track.  
Press the track down button ( ) once to  
skip back to the beginning of the current  
track.  
(Folder repeat)  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.  
RPTis displayed.  
Folder search (during MP3 CD  
playback)  
To change to the previous folder, press the  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
folder down button (  
folder up button (  
the next folder.  
), or press the  
) to advance to  
Random playback  
Tracks are randomly selected and played.  
Music scan  
During music CD playback  
This feature helps to find a program by  
playing about the first 10 seconds of each  
track.  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback to play the tracks on the CD  
randomly. RDMis displayed.  
Press the scan button (  
playback to start the scan play operation  
(the track number will flash).  
) during  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
Press the scan button (  
cancel scan playback.  
) again to  
During MP3 CD playback  
(Folder random)  
NOTE  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will  
playback to play the tracks in the folder  
resume where scan was selected.  
randomly. RDMis displayed.  
Repeat playback  
2. To cancel the random playback, press  
the button again after 3 seconds.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. RPTis displayed.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
6-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(CD random)  
MP3 CD  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks on the CD randomly. RDMis  
displayed.  
File number/Elapsed  
time display  
Folder number/Track  
number  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
Switching the display  
File name  
For files with a file name or other name  
that have been input, the display changes  
in the order of the file names or other  
names each time the display button (  
is pressed during playback.  
Folder name  
)
Album name (ID3 Tag)  
Song name (ID3 Tag)  
Artist name (ID3 Tag)  
Music CD  
Track number/Elapsed  
time display  
File name display  
Album name display  
Artist name display  
NOTE  
(MP3 CD)  
This unit can only read English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on  
the CD writing software used, proper display  
may not be possible.  
Display scroll  
Only 12 characters can be displayed at  
one time. To display the rest of the  
characters of a long title, turn the display  
feed dial (  
) to the right. Hidden  
titles can be scrolled into the display one  
character at a time.  
NOTE  
The displayable number of characters is  
limited. If the number of characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3), exceeds 32  
characters, it may not be fully displayed.  
6-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Message display  
If CHECK CDis displayed, it means  
that there is some CD malfunction. Check  
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and  
then properly reinsert. If the message  
appears again, take the unit to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.  
6-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the In-Dash CD Changer  
Load button Repeat button  
Channel preset buttons  
Fast-forward/Track up  
button  
CD play button CD eject button  
CD slot  
Disc  
up/Folder  
up button  
Disc  
down/Folder  
down button  
Reverse/Track  
down button  
Scan button  
Random button  
Display feed dial  
Display button  
Type  
Playable data  
NOTE  
The CD will begin playback automatically  
after insertion.  
·Music data (CD-DA)  
·MP3 file  
Music/MP3 CD player  
A CD cannot be inserted while the display  
reads WAIT. A beeping sound can be heard  
during this waiting time.  
There will be a short lapse before play begins  
while the player reads the digital signals on  
the CD.  
NOTE  
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and  
MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs  
depending on how the disc was recorded.  
Inserting the CD  
The CD must be label-side up when  
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism  
will set the CD and begin play.  
The disc number and the track number  
will be displayed.  
Normal insertion  
1. Press the load button (  
).  
2. When INis displayed, insert the CD.  
Inserting CDs into desired tray number  
1. Press and hold the load button (  
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
6-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
2. Press the channel preset button for the  
desired tray number while WAITis  
displayed.  
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number  
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (  
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
)
3. When INis displayed, insert the CD.  
The DISC OUTdisplay flashes.  
NOTE  
The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray  
number if the number is already occupied.  
2. Press the channel preset button for the  
desired CD number for less than 5  
seconds after the beep sound is heard.  
Multiple insertion  
3. Pull out the CD.  
1. Press and hold the load button (  
)
Multiple ejection  
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (  
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
)
2. When INis displayed, insert the CD.  
3. When INis displayed again, insert  
The DISC OUTdisplay flashes.  
the next CD.  
2. Press the CD eject button ( ) again  
for less than 5 seconds after the beep  
sound is heard.  
NOTE  
The first-inserted CD will be played  
automatically when:  
NOTE  
l
No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds  
If the button is not pressed and about 5  
seconds have elapsed while DISC OUTis  
flashing, CDs are automatically ejected.  
after INis displayed.  
The CD trays are full.  
l
Displaying the CD-inserted tray  
number  
3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will  
be ejected.  
The tray number is displayed for 5  
NOTE  
seconds when the display button (  
pressed while the disc number/file  
) is  
l
CDs will be ejected starting with the one  
with the lowest number.  
All CDs in the tray will be ejected  
number/elapsed time is displayed in the  
information display.  
l
continuously.  
CDs can be ejected when the ignition  
switch is off. Press and hold the CD eject  
button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all  
CDs will eject.  
Ejecting the CD  
Normal ejection  
l
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The  
disc number and DISC OUTwill be  
displayed.  
Playback  
Press the CD play button ( ) to start  
play when a CD is in the unit.  
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD  
play button ( ) is pressed, NO DISC”  
will flash on and off.  
2. Pull out the CD.  
NOTE  
When the CD is ejected during play, the next  
CD will be played automatically.  
6-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Fast-forward/Reverse  
NOTE  
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will  
resume where scan was selected.  
Press and hold the fast-forward button  
(
) to advance through a track at high  
speed.  
Repeat playback  
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to  
reverse through a track at high speed.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
Track search  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. RPTis displayed.  
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip  
forward to the beginning of the next track.  
Press the track down button ( ) once to  
skip back to the beginning of the current  
track.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
During MP3 CD playback  
(Track repeat)  
Disc search  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
To change the disc, press the DISC button  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. RPTis displayed.  
(
or  
) during playback.  
During MP3 CD playback  
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the  
button again after 3 seconds.  
To change the disc, press the DISC button  
(
or  
) for 1.5 seconds or  
(Folder repeat)  
more during playback.  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
Folder search (during MP3 CD  
playback)  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.  
RPTis displayed.  
To change to the previous folder, press the  
folder down button (  
1.5 seconds, or press the folder up button  
) for less than 1.5 seconds to  
) for less than  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
(
advance to the next folder.  
Random playback  
Music scan  
Tracks are randomly selected and played.  
This feature helps to find a program by  
playing about the first 10 seconds of each  
track.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback to play the tracks in the CD  
randomly. RDMis displayed.  
Press the scan button (  
playback to start the scan play operation  
(the track number will flash).  
Press the scan button (  
cancel scan playback.  
) during  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
) again to  
6-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
During MP3 CD playback  
(Folder random)  
MP3 CD  
Disc number/File  
number/Elapsed time  
display  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback to play the tracks in the folder  
randomly. RDMis displayed.  
Disc tray number  
2. To cancel the random playback, press  
the button again after 3 seconds.  
Disc number/Folder  
(CD random)  
number/Track number  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
File name  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks on the CD randomly. RDMis  
displayed.  
Folder name  
Album name (ID3 Tag)  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
Song name (ID3 Tag)  
Artist name (ID3 Tag)  
Switching the display  
For files with a file name or other name  
that have been input, the display changes  
in the order of the file names or other  
names each time the display button (  
is pressed during playback.  
NOTE  
(MP3 CD)  
)
This unit can only read English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on  
the CD writing software used, proper display  
may not be possible.  
Music CD  
Disc number/Track  
number/Elapsed time display  
Display scroll  
Disc tray number  
File name display  
Album name display  
Artist name display  
Only 12 characters can be displayed at  
one time. To display the rest of the  
characters of a long title, turn the display  
feed dial (  
) to the right. Hidden  
titles can be scrolled into the display one  
character at a time.  
NOTE  
The displayable number of characters is  
limited. If the number of characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3), exceeds 32  
characters, it may not be fully displayed.  
6-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Message display  
If CHECK CDis displayed, it means  
that there is some CD malfunction. Check  
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and  
then properly reinsert. If the message  
appears again, take the unit to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.  
qOperating the Auxiliary jack  
You can connect portable audio units or  
similar products on the market to the  
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio  
over the vehicle's speakers, refer to  
Auxiliary Input (page 6-58).  
6-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qError Indications  
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear  
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Indication  
Cause  
Solution  
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication  
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer  
CD is inserted upside down  
CHECK CD  
Insert another CD properly. If the error indication  
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer  
CD is defective  
6-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qAdjusting the Volume  
Audio Control Switch  
Operation (Steering Wheel)í  
To increase the volume, press the volume  
button ( ).  
When the audio unit is turned on,  
operation of the audio unit from the  
steering wheel is possible.  
To decrease the volume, press the volume  
button ( ).  
NOTE  
Because the audio unit will be turned off under  
the following conditions, the switches will be  
inoperable.  
l
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
LOCK position.  
l
When the power button on the audio unit is  
pressed and the audio unit is turned off.  
l
When the CD being played is ejected and  
the audio unit is turned off.  
qChanging the Source  
Press the mode switch (  
) to change  
the audio source (FM1 radio> FM2 radio>  
AM radio> CD player or CD changer>  
SIRIUS1> SIRIUS2> SIRIUS3> AUX>  
cyclical).  
NOTE  
Mazda has installed this system to prevent  
distraction while driving the vehicle and using  
audio controls on the dashboard.  
Always make safe driving your first priority.  
6-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
When playing a CD  
CD, CD changer and SIRIUS digital satellite  
radio modes cannot be selected in the  
following cases:  
· CD, CD changer, or SIRIUS digital satellite  
radio unit is not equipped on the audio  
system.  
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip to the  
next track.  
Press the seek switch ( ) to repeat the  
current track.  
qMute Switch  
· CD has not been inserted.  
Connect a portable audio unit or similar  
product on the market to the auxiliary jack to  
listen to music or audio over the vehicle's  
speakers. Change the audio source to AUX  
mode (page 6-58).  
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute  
audio, press it again to resume audio  
output.  
NOTE  
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK  
position with the audio muted, the mute will be  
canceled.  
qSeek Switch  
Therefore, when the engine is restarted, the  
audio is not muted. To mute the audio again,  
press the mute switch ( ).  
When listening to the radio or SIRIUS  
digital satellite radio  
Press the seek switch (  
,
), the radio  
switches to the next/previous stored  
station in the order that it was stored  
(16).  
Press the seek switch (  
,
) for about 2  
seconds until a beep sound is heard to  
seek all usable stations at a higher or  
lower frequency whether programmed or  
not.  
6-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
AUX Mode (Auxiliary input)  
l
Before using the auxiliary jack, read the  
manufacturer's instructions for the product  
being connected.  
You can connect portable audio units or  
similar products on the market to the  
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio  
over the vehicle's speakers.  
l
Use a commercially-available, non-  
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for  
connecting the portable audio unit to the  
auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary  
jack, read the manufacture's instructions  
for connecting a portable audio unit to the  
auxiliary jack.  
Auxiliary jack  
l
To prevent discharging of the battery, do  
not use the auxiliary input for long periods  
with the engine off or idling.  
l
l
Noise may occur depending on the product  
connected to the auxiliary jack.  
With regard to connecting a portable audio  
or similar device to a power source, use the  
battery for the device, not the accessory  
socket.  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the portable audio unit  
or a similar product while driving the  
vehicle:  
Connecting the auxiliary jack  
When placing portable audio units or  
similar products in the tray while  
connected to the auxiliary jack, pass the  
connection plug cord through the slot in  
the cap.  
Adjusting the portable audio unit or  
a similar product while driving the  
vehicle is dangerous as it could  
distract your attention from the  
vehicle operation which could lead to  
a serious accident. Always adjust the  
portable audio unit or a similar  
product while the vehicle is stopped.  
Cap slot, closed  
CAUTION  
Cap slot, opened  
Ø Close the cover when the auxiliary  
jack is not in use to prevent  
foreign objects and liquids from  
penetrating the auxiliary jack.  
Ø Noise may occur during playback  
if the accessory socket equipped  
on the vehicle is used. (If noise  
occurs, do not use the accessory  
socket.)  
1. Open the console lid by pulling the  
upper release catch.  
2. Remove the tray mat.  
6-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
3. Using a coin, turn the cap  
WARNING  
Do not allow the connection plug cord  
to get tangled with the parking brake  
or the shift lever:  
counterclockwise (about 45° from the  
closed position) and remove it.  
NOTE  
Do NOT discard the cap.  
Allowing the plug cord to become  
tangled with the parking brake or  
the shift lever is dangerous as it  
could interfere with driving, resulting  
in an accident.  
CAUTION  
Do not place objects or apply force to  
the auxiliary jack with the plug  
connected.  
NOTE  
l
Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack  
4. Open the tray by pulling the lower  
release catch.  
securely.  
l
Insert or remove the plug with the plug  
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack hole.  
Insert or remove the plug by holding its  
base.  
5. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the hole of the tray and insert the plug  
in the auxiliary jack.  
l
6. Make sure the connection plug cord is  
running through the cap slot; reinstall  
the cap and turn it clockwise (about  
45° to the opened position).  
Plug  
Connection plug  
cord  
6-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
7. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the slit in the tray mat and then set the  
tray mat in place.  
NOTE  
l
Set the volume of the portable audio unit to  
the maximum within the range that the  
sound does not become distorted, then  
adjust the volume using the power/volume  
dial of the audio unit or the volume button  
(
,
) of the audio control switch.  
l
If the connection plug is pulled out from the  
auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise  
may occur.  
To operate the portable audio unit  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or  
ON position.  
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the  
audio system on.  
3. Press the MEDIA button (  
the audio unit or the mode switch  
) of the audio control switch to  
change to the AUX mode.  
) of  
(
6-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Safety Certification  
This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC  
requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of  
Health and Human Services.  
CAUTION  
Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified  
service personnel.  
If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD  
player with the top case of the unit removed.  
Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
NOTE  
For CD player section:  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
NOTE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
6-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Sunvisors  
Interior Lights  
qIlluminated Entry Systemí  
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for  
use in front or swing it to the side.  
When the illuminated entry system  
operates, the overhead light (switch is in  
the DOOR position) turns on for:  
Sunvisor  
l
About 30 seconds after the driver's  
door is unlocked and the ignition  
switch is in the LOCK position (with  
the ignition key removed).  
l
About 15 seconds after all doors are  
closed.  
l
About 15 seconds after the ignition  
switch is in the LOCK position (with  
the ignition key removed) with all  
doors closed.  
qVanity Mirrorsí  
The light also turns off when:  
To use the vanity mirror, lower the  
sunvisor.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a vanity  
mirror light, it will illuminate when you  
open the cover.  
l
The ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position and all doors are closed.  
The driver's door is locked.  
l
NOTE  
Battery saver  
If any door is left opened, the light goes out  
after about 30 minutes to save the battery.  
The light turns on again when the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON position, or when  
any door is opened after all doors have been  
closed.  
6-62  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qOverhead Lightsí  
Switch  
Position  
Rear Overhead Lights  
Front  
Light off  
Light is on when any door is open  
(With illuminated entry system)  
Light is on or off when the  
illuminated entry system is on  
Light on  
qMap Lightsí  
The map lights are switched on or off by  
pressing the switches.  
Switch Position  
Front Overhead Lights  
Switches  
Light off  
l
Light is on when any door is  
open  
l
(With illuminated entry  
system)  
Light is on or off when the  
illuminated entry system is  
on  
Rear  
qLuggage Compartment Light (5  
Door)  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-63  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Switch  
Position  
Luggage Compartment Light  
Light off  
Light on when the liftgate is open  
6-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Information Display  
Climate control display/Ambient  
temperature display  
Trip computer/Clock  
Audio display  
With trip computer  
Without trip computer  
qInformation Display Functions  
The information display has the following functions:  
l
Clock  
Ambient Temperature Display (Outside Temperature Display)í  
Climate Control Display (Fully Automatic Type Air Conditioning System)  
Audio Display  
l
l
l
l
Trip Computerí  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-65  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
NOTE  
l
qClock  
When the: 00 button is pressed, the seconds  
are reset to 00.  
Trip computer-equipped vehicles do not  
have a reset function.  
NOTE  
When the trip computer is displayed, press the  
CLOCK button to change the display to the  
time.  
l
Switching between 12 and 24-hour  
clock time  
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or  
ON position, the time is displayed.  
1. Press the audio control dial several  
times until 12Hr and 24Hr clock time  
are displayed.  
2. Turn the audio control dial in either  
direction, select the desired clock  
setting, and then press the audio  
control dial. Press the dial while the  
preferred clock time is flashing.  
qAmbient Temperature Displayí  
With fully automatic type air  
conditioner  
Time setting  
When the ignition switch is in the ON  
position, press the AMB switch (page  
6-11) on the air conditioner control panel  
to display the ambient temperature.  
1. Press the CLOCK button until the beep  
sounds and the displayed time flashes.  
2. Press the H button to set the hour.  
Press the AMB switch again to switch the  
display from ambient temperature to the  
temperature set for the air conditioner.  
3. Press the M button to set the minutes,  
then press the CLOCK button.  
Time resetting  
1. Press the CLOCK button until the beep  
sounds and the displayed time flashes.  
2. Press the: 00 button. When the button  
is pressed, the beep sounds and the  
clock resets as follows:  
(Example)  
12:0112:2912:00  
12:3012:591:00  
6-66  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Without fully automatic type air  
conditioner  
qAudio Display  
The audio system status is displayed. To  
operate the audio system, refer to  
Audio System(page 6-16).  
When the ignition switch is in the ON  
position, the ambient temperature is  
displayed.  
qTrip Computerí  
The trip computer can display the  
following:  
l
The current fuel economy.  
The average fuel economy.  
The approximate distance you can  
l
l
travel on the available fuel.  
The average vehicle speed.  
l
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position.  
Press the INFO switch to change the  
display mode.  
NOTE  
l
Under the following conditions, the ambient  
NOTE  
temperature display may differ from the  
actual ambient temperature depending on  
the surroundings and vehicle conditions:  
When the time is being displayed, press the  
INFO switch to change the display to the trip  
computer.  
l
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.  
Sudden changes in ambient temperature.  
The vehicle is parked.  
If you have any problems with your trip  
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
l
l
l
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.  
l
Press the Power/volume switch and MEDIA  
Current fuel economy mode  
button (page 6-28) simultaneously for 5  
seconds or more to switch the display from  
Fahrenheit to Centigrade or vice versa.  
This mode displays the current fuel  
economy by calculating the amount of  
fuel consumption and the distance  
traveled.  
qClimate Control Display (Fully  
Automatic Type)  
Current fuel economy will be calculated  
and displayed every 2 seconds.  
The climate control system status is  
displayed. To operate the climate control  
system, refer to Climate Control System”  
(page 6-2).  
When this mode is selected, CONSUM  
CUR will be displayed.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-67  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
U.S.A.  
U.S.A.  
CANADA  
CANADA  
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3  
mph), —— L/100 km (——mpg) will be  
displayed.  
To clear the data being displayed, press  
the INFO switch for more than 1 second.  
After pressing the INFO switch, —— L/  
100 km (—— mpg) will be displayed for  
about 1 minute before the fuel economy is  
recalculated and displayed.  
Average fuel economy mode  
This mode displays the average fuel  
economy by calculating the fuel  
consumption and the distance traveled  
since connecting the battery or resetting  
the data.  
Distance-to-empty mode  
This mode displays the approximate  
distance you can travel on the remaining  
fuel based on the fuel economy.  
Average fuel economy will be calculated  
and displayed every minute.  
The distance-to-empty will be calculated  
and displayed every minute.  
When this mode is selected, CONSUM  
AV will be displayed.  
When this mode is selected, REMNG will  
be displayed.  
6-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
U.S.A.  
Average vehicle speed will be calculated  
and displayed every 10 seconds.  
When this mode is selected, AV will be  
displayed.  
U.S.A.  
CANADA  
CANADA  
NOTE  
l
Even though the distance-to-empty display  
may indicate a sufficient amount of  
remaining mileage before refueling is  
required, refuel as soon as possible if the  
fuel gauge needle nears E or the low fuel  
warning light illuminates.  
The display won't change unless you add  
more than approximately 20 L (5.3 gal) of  
fuel.  
To clear the data being displayed, press  
the INFO switch for more than 1 second.  
After pressing the INFO switch, ——  
km/h (—— mile/h) will be displayed for  
about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is  
recalculated and displayed.  
l
Average vehicle speed mode  
This mode displays the average vehicle  
speed by calculating the distance and the  
time traveled since connecting the battery  
or resetting the data.  
6-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Lighter  
Ashtray  
CAUTION  
The ignition switch must be in the ACC  
or ON position  
Do not use the ashtray for trash. You  
might start a fire.  
Press the lighter in and release it. When  
ready for use, it automatically pops out.  
To use, open the cover.  
CAUTION  
To remove, open the cover and pull up the  
ashtray.  
Ø Don't touch the metal part of the  
lighter, you may burn yourself.  
Ø Don't hold the lighter in because it  
will overheat.  
Ø Don't use the lighter socket for  
plug-in accessories such as  
shavers and coffee pots. They may  
damage it or cause electrical  
failure. Use only a genuine Mazda  
lighter or the equivalent.  
Ø If the lighter doesn't pop out  
within 30 seconds, remove it to  
prevent overheating.  
6-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qRear  
Cup Holder  
WARNING  
The rear cup holder is on the rear center  
armrest.  
Never use a cup holder to hold hot  
liquids while the vehicle is moving:  
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids  
while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. If the contents spill, you  
could be scalded.  
Do not put anything other than cups or  
drink cans in cup holders:  
Putting objects other than cups or  
drink cans in a cup holder is  
dangerous.  
During sudden braking or  
maneuvering, occupants could be hit  
and injured, or objects could be  
thrown around the vehicle, causing  
interference with the driver and the  
possibility of an accident. Only use a  
cup holder for cups or drink cans.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the possibility of injury in  
an accident or a sudden stop, keep  
cup holders closed when not in use.  
qFront  
To use, open the cover.  
6-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Bottle Holder  
Storage Compartments  
Bottle holders are on the inside of the  
front doors.  
WARNING  
Keep storage boxes closed when  
driving:  
Driving with the storage boxes open  
is dangerous. To reduce the  
possibility of injury in an accident or  
a sudden stop, keep the storage  
boxes closed when driving.  
CAUTION  
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in  
the storage boxes while parked under  
the sun. A lighter could explode or  
the plastic material in eyeglasses  
could deform and crack from high  
temperature.  
Bottle holder  
CAUTION  
Do not use the bottle holders for  
containers without caps. The  
contents may spill when the door is  
opened or closed.  
qGlove Box  
To open the glove box, pull the latch  
toward you.  
If the glove box has a lock, insert the key  
and turn it clockwise to lock,  
counterclockwise to unlock.  
Unlock  
Lock  
6-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Use the loops in the luggage compartment  
to secure cargo with a rope or net. The  
tensile strength of the loops is 196 N (20  
kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force  
to the loops as it will damage them.  
qCenter Console  
To open, pull the lower release latch.  
Small items can be placed in the tray of  
the center console lid.  
To open it, pull the upper release latch.  
NOTE  
To secure cargo with a rope or net, the trunk  
board loops can be used in the same way as  
the cargo securing loops (page 6-74).  
q
Cargo Sub-Compartment (5 Door)í  
With flexible floor board  
To use the cargo sub-compartment,  
partially open or remove the trunk boards.  
Trunk board  
qCargo Securing Loops (5 Door)  
WARNING  
Make sure luggage and cargo is  
secured before driving:  
Not securing cargo while driving is  
dangerous as it could move or be  
crushed during sudden braking or a  
collision and cause injury.  
Cargo sub-  
compartment  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-73  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Without flexible floor board  
NOTE  
The trunk board loops can be used in the same  
way as the cargo securing loops. The tensile  
strength of the loops is 147 N (15 kgf, 33 lbf).  
Do not apply excessive force to the trunk board  
loops as it will damage them (page 6-73).  
To use the cargo sub-compartment,  
remove or lift the trunk board.  
Trunk board  
Compartment  
Front trunk board  
divider loops  
Cargo sub-  
compartment  
qFlexible Floor Board (5 Door)í  
Rear trunk board  
The luggage compartment can be  
separated vertically and/or horizontally,  
using the trunk board and the trunk board  
loops.  
To separate vertically  
Use the rear trunk board to separate the  
luggage compartment vertically.  
1. Pull the trunk board loops out.  
Compartment  
divider loop  
CAUTION  
Make sure the trunk board is firmly  
secured when it is fitted into the  
trunk board loops. If it is not firmly  
secured, it could unexpectedly  
disengage causing damage to the  
trunk board loops or the trunk  
board.  
6-74  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
2. Insert the trunk board loops into the  
trunk board slits.  
CAUTION  
Ø Do not place heavy objects on the  
trunk board or apply excessive  
force as they could damage the  
trunk board. The permissible  
weight is about 5 kg (11 lb).  
Ø Do not use the rear trunk board to  
separate the luggage  
Trunk  
board  
compartment horizontally. The  
rear trunk board cannot be locked  
to the trunk board loops and it  
could move and cause injury while  
the vehicle is moving.  
Front  
NOTE  
1. Pull the trunk board loops out.  
To facilitate insertion of the trunk board loops  
into the trunk board slits, first insert the  
bottom of the rear trunk board into the groove  
of the luggage sub-compartment.  
Compartment  
divider loop  
2. Insert the trunk board loop into slit A.  
Cargo sub-  
Groove  
compartment  
3. Rock the trunk board to make sure the  
board is installed securely.  
To separate horizontally  
Use the front trunk board to separate the  
luggage compartment horizontally.  
Slit A  
6-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
3. Insert the other trunk board loop into  
slit B until a click sound is heard.  
Accessory Sockets  
The ignition switch must be in the ACC  
or ON position to prevent the battery from  
discharging.  
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or  
the equivalent requiring no greater than  
120 W (DC 12 V, 7 A).  
Slit B  
4. Rock the trunk board to make sure the  
board is installed securely.  
CAUTION  
Do not place or remove luggage via  
the rear passenger seat area while  
the vehicle is moving. The trunk  
board or luggage could move and  
cause injury.  
CAUTION  
To prevent accessory socket damage  
or electrical failure, pay attention to  
the following:  
Ø Do not use accessories that require  
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 7 A).  
Ø Do not use accessories that are not  
genuine Mazda accessories or the  
equivalent.  
Ø Close the cover when the accessory  
socket is not in use to prevent  
foreign objects and liquids from  
getting into the accessory socket.  
Ø Correctly insert the plug into the  
accessory socket.  
Noise may occur on the audio  
playback depending on the device  
connected to the accessory socket.  
NOTE  
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not  
use the socket for long periods with the engine  
off or idling.  
6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
When placing an electrical device (e.g.  
cellular phone) in the tray which is  
connected to the accessory socket, pass  
the connection plug cord through the slot  
in the cap.  
5. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the hole of the tray and insert the plug  
in the socket.  
Plug  
Cap slot, closed  
Cap slot, opened  
6. Make sure the connection plug cord is  
running through the cap slot; reinstall  
the cap and turn it clockwise (about  
45° to the opened position).  
1. Open the lid by pulling the upper  
release catch.  
2. Remove the tray mat.  
Connection plug  
cord  
3. Using a coin, turn the cap  
counterclockwise (about 45° from the  
closed position) and remove it.  
NOTE  
Do NOT discard the cap.  
4. Open the tray by pulling the lower  
release catch.  
6-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
7. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the slit in the tray mat and then set the  
tray mat in place.  
6-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
7
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3  
Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-16  
Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-16  
Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-21  
Towing Description ................................................................. 7-21  
Tiedown Hook ........................................................................ 7-22  
Recreational Towing ............................................................... 7-23  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Parking in an Emergency  
Parking in an Emergency  
The hazard warning lights should always  
be used when you stop on or near a  
roadway in an emergency.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard  
and that they must take extreme caution  
when near it.  
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all  
the turn signals will flash.  
NOTE  
l
The turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning lights are on.  
l
Check local regulations about the use of  
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is  
being towed to verify that it is not in  
violation of the law.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
Spare Tire and Tool Storage  
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.  
4 Door  
Spare tire  
Jack  
Tiedown eyelet  
Lug wrench  
Jack handle  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
5 Door  
(Type A)  
Tiedown eyelet  
Lug wrench  
Jack  
Jack handle  
Spare tire  
Tiedown eyelet  
(Type B)  
Lug wrench  
Jack  
Jack handle  
Spare tire  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
To secure the jack  
qJack  
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with  
the jack screw pointing up and turn the  
wing bolt clockwise to temporarily  
tighten it.  
To remove the jack  
1. Turn the knob and remove the cover.  
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction  
shown in the figure.  
Jack screw  
2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw  
counterclockwise.  
Wing bolt  
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to  
secure the jack.  
Jack screw  
NOTE  
If the jack is not completely secured, it could  
rattle while driving. Make sure the jack screw  
is sufficiently tightened.  
Wing bolt  
qSpare Tire  
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.  
The temporary spare tire is lighter and  
smaller than a conventional tire, and is  
designed only for emergency use and  
should be used only for VERY short  
periods. Temporary spare tires should  
NEVER be used for long drives or  
extended periods.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
WARNING  
Do not install the temporary spare tire  
on the front wheels (driving wheels)  
when driving on ice or snow:  
CAUTION  
Ø When using the temporary spare  
tire, driving stability may decrease  
compared to when using only the  
conventional tire.  
Driving with a spare tire on the front  
(driving) wheels on ice or snow is  
dangerous. Handling will be affected.  
You could lose control of the vehicle  
and have an accident. Put the spare  
tire on the rear axle and move a  
regular tire to the front.  
Drive carefully.  
Ø To avoid damage to the temporary  
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe  
the following precautions:  
Ø
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50  
mph).  
Ø
Avoid driving over obstacles.  
Also, do not drive through an  
automatic car wash. This tire's  
diameter is smaller than a  
conventional tire's, so the  
ground clearance is reduced  
about 25 mm (1 in).  
Ø
Ø
Do not use a tire chain on this  
tire because it won't fit  
properly.  
Do not use your temporary  
spare tire on any other vehicle;  
it has been designed only for  
your Mazda.  
Use only one temporary spare  
tire on your vehicle at the same  
time.  
Ø
Ø (With limited slip differential)  
When using the temporary spare  
tire on the front axle, replace it  
with a standard tire as soon as  
possible. The size difference  
between the spare and the  
standard tire will cause the limited  
slip differential to malfunction.  
NOTE  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used (page 5-29).  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
To remove the spare tire  
(4 Door)  
(5 Door)  
1. Remove the trunk mat, trunk board and  
cargo sub-compartment.  
1. Remove the trunk mat and trunk board.  
(Type A)  
(Type B)  
2. Turn the tire hold-down bolt  
2. Turn the tire hold-down bolt  
counterclockwise with the lug wrench.  
counterclockwise with the lug wrench.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
NOTE  
Changing a Flat Tire  
l
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before  
using it.  
NOTE  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
If the following occurs while driving, it could  
indicate a flat tire.  
l
Be sure to register the tire pressure sensor  
ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are  
changed (page 5-31).  
l
Steering becomes difficult.  
The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.  
l
l
The vehicle pulls in one direction.  
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-  
way and firmly set the parking brake.  
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a  
level spot that is well off the road and out  
of the way of traffic to change the tire.  
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a  
busy road is dangerous.  
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle in Park (P), a manual  
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn  
off the engine.  
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.  
WARNING  
Be sure to follow the directions for  
changing a tire, and never get under a  
vehicle that is supported only by a jack:  
Changing a tire is dangerous if not  
done properly. The vehicle can slip off  
the jack and seriously injure  
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle  
and away from the vehicle and traffic.  
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire  
(page 7-3).  
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite  
the flat tire. When blocking a wheel,  
place a tire block both in front and  
behind the tire.  
someone.  
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle  
supported by a jack:  
Allowing someone to remain in a  
vehicle supported by a jack is  
dangerous. The occupant could cause  
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious  
injury.  
CAUTION  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System)  
The wheels equipped on your Mazda  
are specially designed for installation  
of the tire pressure sensors. Do not  
use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it  
may not be possible to install the tire  
pressure sensors.  
NOTE  
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks  
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in  
place.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them  
counterclockwise one turn each, but  
don't remove any lug nuts until the tire  
has been raised off the ground.  
qRemoving a Flat Tire  
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a  
wheel cover, pry off the wheel cover  
with the beveled end of the lug wrench.  
3. Place the jack under the jacking  
position closest to the tire being  
changed.  
NOTE  
Force the end of the lug wrench firmly between  
wheel and cover, or removal will be difficult.  
CAUTION  
There is a valve-stem mark inside the  
wheel cover. When installing the  
wheel cover, align this mark with the  
tire's valve stem.  
Damage could occur during  
installation if the wheel cover is not  
properly aligned.  
Jacking position  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise and  
raise the vehicle high enough so that  
the spare tire can be installed. Before  
removing the lug nuts, make sure your  
Mazda is firmly in position and that it  
cannot slip or move.  
WARNING  
Use only the front and rear jacking  
positions recommended in this manual:  
Attempting to jack the vehicle in  
positions other than those  
recommended in this manual is  
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off  
the jack and seriously injure or even  
kill someone. Use only the front and  
rear jacking positions recommended  
in this manual.  
Use only the jack provided with your  
Mazda:  
Using a jack that is not designed for  
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle  
could slip off the jack and seriously  
injure someone.  
6. Remove the lug nuts by turning them  
counterclockwise; then remove the  
wheel and center cap.  
Never place objects under the jack:  
Jacking the vehicle with an object  
under the jack is dangerous. The jack  
could slip and someone could be  
seriously injured by the jack or the  
falling vehicle.  
4. Insert the jack handle into the jack.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
qLocking Lug Nutsí  
To install the nut  
1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be  
sure to hold the key square to it. If you  
hold the key at an angle, you may  
damage both key and nut. Don't use a  
power impact wrench.  
If your vehicle has optional antitheft  
wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will  
lock the tires and you must use a special  
key to unlock them. This key is attached  
to the lug wrench and is stored with the  
spare tire. Register them with the lock  
manufacturer by filling out the card  
provided in the glove box and mailing it  
in the accompanying envelope. If you lose  
this key, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's  
order form, which is with the registration  
card.  
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key,  
apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.  
qMounting the Spare Tire  
1. Remove dirt and grime from the  
mounting surfaces of the wheel and  
hub, including the hub bolts, with a  
cloth.  
Antitheft lug nut  
Special key  
To remove an antitheft lug nut  
1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.  
WARNING  
Make sure the mounting surfaces of  
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean  
before changing or replacing tires:  
When changing or replacing a tire,  
not removing dirt and grime from the  
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub  
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug  
nuts could loosen while driving and  
cause the tire to come off, resulting in  
an accident.  
2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be  
sure to hold the key square to it. If you  
hold the key at an angle, you may  
damage both key and nut. Don't use a  
power impact wrench.  
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key  
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench  
counterclockwise.  
2. Mount the spare tire.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-11  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled  
edge inward; tighten them by hand.  
If you're unsure of how tight the nuts  
should be, have them inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Nut tightening torque  
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)  
88118 (912, 6587)  
WARNING  
Always securely and correctly tighten  
the lug nuts:  
Improperly or loosely tightened lug  
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could  
wobble or come off. This could result  
in loss of vehicle control and cause a  
serious accident.  
WARNING  
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you  
removed or replace them with metric  
nuts of the same configuration:  
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts  
on your Mazda have metric threads,  
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.  
On a metric stud, it would not secure  
the wheel and would damage the  
stud, which could cause the wheel to  
slip off and cause an accident.  
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts  
and bolts and do not tighten the lug  
nuts beyond the recommended  
tightening torque:  
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and  
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts  
could loosen while driving and cause  
the tire to come off, resulting in an  
accident. In addition, lug nuts and  
bolts could be damaged if tightened  
more than necessary.  
5. Store the damaged tire, using the tire  
hold-down bolt to hold it in place.  
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise  
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug  
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order  
shown.  
Tire clamp  
Tire hold-down bolt  
6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to  
the specification charts on page 10-8.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
7. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced  
as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with any tires that have  
incorrect air pressure:  
Driving on tires with incorrect air  
pressure is dangerous. Tires with  
incorrect pressure could affect  
handling and result in an accident.  
When you check the regular tires' air  
pressure, check the spare tire, too.  
NOTE  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used (page 5-29).  
NOTE  
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store  
them properly.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Overheating  
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle in park (P), a manual  
transaxle in neutral.  
Overheating  
If the temperature gauge indicates  
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or  
you hear a loud knocking or pinging  
noise, the engine is probably too hot.  
3. Apply the parking brake.  
4. Turn off the air conditioner.  
5. Check whether coolant or steam is  
escaping from under the hood or from  
the engine compartment.  
WARNING  
If steam is coming from the engine  
compartment:  
Don't go near the front of the vehicle.  
Stop the engine.  
Wait until the steam dissipates, then  
open the hood and start the engine.  
Turn off the ignition switch and  
make sure the fan is not running before  
attempting to work near the cooling  
fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it  
is running is dangerous. The fan  
could continue running indefinitely  
even if the engine has stopped and  
the engine compartment temperature  
is high. You could be hit by the fan  
and seriously injured.  
If neither coolant nor steam is  
escaping:  
Open the hood and idle the engine until  
it cools.  
CAUTION  
If the cooling fan does not operate  
while the engine is running, the  
engine temperature will increase.  
Stop the engine and call an  
Do not remove the cooling  
system cap when the engine and  
radiator are hot:  
When the engine and radiator are  
hot, scalding coolant and steam may  
shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury.  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,  
then turn off the engine after the  
temperature has decreased.  
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no  
longer escaping from the engine:  
Steam from an overheated engine is  
dangerous. The escaping steam could  
seriously burn you.  
7. When cool, check the coolant level.  
If it's low, look for coolant leaks from  
the radiator and hoses.  
If the temperature gauge indicates  
overheating:  
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and  
park off the right-of-way.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Overheating  
If you find a leak or other damage, or if  
coolant is still leaking:  
Stop the engine and call an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
If you find no problems, the engine is  
cool, and no leaks are obvious:  
Carefully add coolant as required (page  
8-21).  
CAUTION  
If the engine continues to overheat or  
frequently overheats, have the  
cooling system inspected. The engine  
could be seriously damaged unless  
repairs are made. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Starting a Flooded Engine  
If the engine fails to start, it may be  
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).  
Follow this procedure:  
1. If the engine does not start within five  
seconds on the first try, turn the key to  
the LOCK position, wait ten seconds  
and try again.  
2. Depress the accelerator all the way and  
hold it there.  
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START  
position and hold it therefor up to  
ten seconds. If the engine starts, release  
the key and accelerator immediately  
because the engine will suddenly rev  
up.  
4. If the engine fails to start, crank it  
without depressing the acceleratorfor  
up to ten seconds.  
If the engine still does not start using the  
above procedure, have your vehicle  
inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Jump-Starting  
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you  
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service  
technician do the work.  
WARNING  
Follow These Precautions Carefully:  
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions  
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.  
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:  
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID  
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.  
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery  
fluid:  
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.  
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in  
eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15  
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.  
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:  
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause  
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.  
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that  
could cause sparks:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a  
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative (  
terminal of the battery.  
)
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.  
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:  
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may  
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.  
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:  
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the  
discharged battery is dangerous.  
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.  
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:  
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.  
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.  
CAUTION  
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and  
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in  
series or a 24 V motor generator set).  
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.  
Discharged  
battery  
Jumper cables  
Booster battery  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
1. Remove the battery cover from its front  
side.  
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the  
cables in the reverse order described in  
the illustration.  
Battery cover  
NOTE  
Verify that the covers are securely installed.  
2. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V  
and that its negative terminal is  
grounded.  
3. If the booster battery is in another  
vehicle, don't allow both vehicles to  
touch. Turn off the engine of the  
vehicle with the booster battery and all  
unnecessary electrical loads in both  
vehicles.  
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact  
sequence as in the illustration.  
l
Connect one end of a cable to the  
positive terminal on the discharged  
battery (1).  
Attach the other end to the positive  
l
terminal on the booster battery (2).  
Connect one end of the other cable  
l
to the negative terminal of the  
booster battery (3).  
Connect the other end to the ground  
l
point indicated in the illustration  
away from the discharged battery  
(4).  
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle  
and run it a few minutes. Then start the  
engine of the other vehicle.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Push-Starting  
Do not push-start your Mazda.  
WARNING  
Never tow a vehicle to start it:  
Towing a vehicle to start it is  
dangerous. The vehicle being towed  
could surge forward when its engine  
starts, causing the two vehicles to  
collide. The occupants could be  
injured.  
CAUTION  
Do not push-start a vehicle that has  
a manual transaxle. It can damage  
the emission control system.  
NOTE  
You can't start a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle by pushing it.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Towing  
Towing Description  
CAUTION  
Do not tow the vehicle pointed  
backward with driving wheels on the  
ground. This may cause internal  
damage to the transaxle.  
We recommend that towing be done only  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a  
commercial tow-truck service.  
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to  
prevent damage to the vehicle.  
Government and local laws must be  
followed.  
A towed vehicle usually should have its  
drive wheels (front wheels) off the  
ground. If excessive damage or other  
conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.  
CAUTION  
Do not tow with sling-type  
equipment. This could damage your  
vehicle. Use wheel-lift or flatbed  
equipment.  
Wheel dollies  
When towing with the rear wheels on the  
ground, release the parking brake.  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Towing  
Tiedown Hook  
CAUTION  
Don't use the tiedown hook under  
the rear for towing.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the hooks under the rear  
bumper for towing and tying down,  
as they cannot hold the load and it  
will damage the bumper.  
It is designed ONLY for tying down  
the vehicle when it's being  
transported. Using it for towing will  
damage the bumper.  
qTiedown Hook-Front  
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug  
wrench from the trunk (page 7-3).  
2. Wrap the lug wrench with a soft cloth  
to prevent damage to the bumper and  
open the cap located on the front  
bumper.  
Hooks  
CAUTION  
The cap cannot be completely  
removed. Do not use excessive force  
as it may damage the cap or scratch  
the painted bumper surface.  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Towing  
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet  
using the lug wrench.  
Recreational Towing  
An example of recreational towingis  
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.  
The transaxle is not designed for towing  
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.  
When doing recreational towing refer to  
Towing Description(page 7-21) and  
Tiedown Hook(page 7-22) and  
carefully follow the instructions.  
Lug wrench  
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown  
eyelet.  
CAUTION  
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely  
tightened, it may loosen or disengage  
from the bumper when tying down  
the vehicle. Make sure that the  
tiedown eyelet is securely tightened  
to the bumper.  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
8
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 8-3  
Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 8-15  
Owner Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 8-15  
Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 8-16  
Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 8-17  
Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 8-21  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF)í ........................................ 8-25  
Body Lubrication .................................................................... 8-28  
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-29  
Battery ..................................................................................... 8-32  
Tires ........................................................................................ 8-35  
Appearance Care ........................................................................ 8-58  
How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage .................... 8-58  
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-60  
Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-63  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Introduction  
Introduction  
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle  
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.  
If you're unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable  
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.  
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your  
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This  
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.  
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as  
prescribed.  
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective  
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.  
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may  
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico)  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions  
apply.  
l
Repeated short-distance driving  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Driving with extended use of brakes  
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used  
Driving on rough or muddy roads  
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
Driving in extremely hot conditions  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually  
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).  
NOTE  
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended  
intervals.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 1  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
6
12  
24  
15  
18  
36  
24  
48  
30  
30  
60  
36  
72  
45  
42  
84  
48  
96  
60  
Maintenance Interval  
12  
7.5  
22.5  
37.5  
52.5  
ENGINE  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,  
adjust  
Engine valve clearance  
Drive belts (tension)  
Engine oil  
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after  
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,  
every 2 years  
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2  
Hoses and tubes for emission*2  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
I
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)  
I
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Disc brakes  
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)  
I
Steering operation and linkages  
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years  
L
L
L
L
T
L
L
L
L
T
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
6
12  
24  
15  
18  
36  
24  
48  
30  
30  
60  
36  
72  
45  
42  
84  
48  
96  
60  
Maintenance Interval  
12  
7.5  
22.5  
37.5  
52.5  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years  
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription FL22on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 2  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  
Maintenance Interval  
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
ENGINE  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,  
adjust  
Engine valve clearance  
Drive belts (tension)  
I
Puerto Rico  
Others  
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after  
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,  
every 2 years  
Engine coolant level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM  
Puerto Rico  
Others  
R
R
Air filter  
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2  
Hoses and tubes for emission*2  
I
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs (without turbocharger)  
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)  
Replace every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)  
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)  
USA  
Spark plugs (with turbocharger)  
Others*3  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  
Maintenance Interval  
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake and clutch fluid level  
Disc brakes  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
T
T
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years  
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription FL22on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
*3 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the spark plugs at every  
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or shorter.  
a) Repeated short-distance driving  
b) Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
c) Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions  
apply.  
l
Repeated short-distance driving  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Driving with extended use of brakes  
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used  
Driving on rough or muddy roads  
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
Driving in extremely hot conditions  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually  
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.  
NOTE  
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended  
intervals.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 1  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72  
×1000 km  
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance  
Drive belts (tension)  
Engine oil  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
R
R
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
R
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
R
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
R
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake and clutch fluid level  
Brake fluid  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
T
T
T
T
T
T
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72  
×1000 km  
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription FL22on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 2  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36  
×1000 km  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance  
Drive belts (tension)  
Engine oil  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
Engine coolant level  
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
C
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
CHASSIS and BODY  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake and clutch fluid level  
Brake fluid  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
T
T
T
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36  
×1000 km  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
C: Clean  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription FL22on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
(Cont.)  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
×1000 km  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance  
Drive belts (tension)  
Engine oil  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
R
I
Engine coolant level  
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
C
R
C
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
CHASSIS and BODY  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake and clutch fluid level  
Brake fluid  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
T
T
T
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
×1000 km  
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
C: Clean  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription FL22on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Owner Maintenance Schedule  
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the  
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.  
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service  
technician as soon as possible.  
qWhen Refueling  
l
Brake and clutch fluid level (page 8-23)  
Engine coolant level (page 8-21)  
Engine oil level (page 8-20)  
Washer fluid level (page 8-27)  
l
l
l
qAt Least Monthly  
Tire inflation pressures (page 8-35)  
qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)  
l
Automatic transaxle fluid level (page 8-25)  
Power steering fluid level (page 8-24)  
l
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical  
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.  
l
Engine coolant (page 8-21)  
Engine oil (page 8-18)  
l
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Owner Maintenance Precautions  
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only  
for items that are easy to perform.  
As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedures can be done only by a  
qualified service technician with special tools.  
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.  
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If  
you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please  
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.  
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or  
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a  
qualified technician:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You  
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.  
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you  
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all  
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling  
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:  
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even  
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.  
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.  
Turn off the ignition switch and make sure the fan is not running before attempting  
to work near the cooling fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could  
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine  
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.  
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:  
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do  
not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.  
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a  
fire leading to an unexpected accident.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Engine Compartment Overview  
Without turbocharger  
Main fuse  
Battery  
Engine coolant  
reservoir  
Engine oil-filler cap  
Brake/Clutch fluid  
reservoir  
Fuse block  
Engine oil  
dipstick  
Power steering  
fluid reservoir  
Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick  
(Only for automatic transaxle)  
Windshield washer  
fluid reservoir  
With turbocharger  
Engine coolant reservoir  
Main fuse  
Fuse block  
Power steering  
fluid reservoir  
Engine oil-filler cap  
Brake/Clutch fluid Battery  
reservoir  
Windshield washer  
fluid reservoir  
Engine oil dipstick  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Only use oils Certified For Gasoline  
Enginesby the American Petroleum  
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark  
symbol conforms to the current engine  
and emission system protection standards  
and fuel economy requirements of the  
International Lubricant Standardization  
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),  
comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
Engine Oil  
NOTE  
Changing the engine oil should be done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qRecommended Oil  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil (Without  
turbocharger).  
Oil container labels provide important  
automobile manufacturers.  
information.  
A chief contribution this type of oil makes  
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of  
fuel necessary to overcome engine  
friction.  
–10  
10  
30  
–30  
20  
40 50  
–20  
0
–20  
80  
100  
120  
0
20 40  
60  
U.S.A. and CANADA  
5W-20  
Except U.S.A. and CANADA  
(ILSAC)  
(ILSAC)  
Mexico  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. If SAE 5W-20  
engine oil is not available in your market. Use  
SAE 5W-30 engine oil.  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC  
must be on the label.  
Only use oils Certified For Gasoline  
Enginesby the American Petroleum  
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark  
symbol conforms to the current engine  
and emission system protection standards  
and fuel economy requirements of the  
International Lubricant Standardization  
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),  
comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
–10  
10  
30  
–30  
20  
40 50  
–20  
0
–20  
80  
100  
120  
0
20 40  
60  
automobile manufacturers.  
5W-20  
–30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50  
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil (With  
turbocharger).  
Oil container labels provide important  
–20  
0
20 40 60 80 100 120  
information.  
5W-30  
A chief contribution this type of oil makes  
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of  
fuel necessary to overcome engine  
friction.  
Except U.S.A. and CANADA  
U.S.A. and CANADA  
(ILSAC)  
(ILSAC)  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC  
must be on the label.  
With turbocharger  
–30 –20 –10  
0
10 20 30 40 50  
Max  
OK  
–20  
0
20 40 60 80 100 120  
Min  
5W-30  
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.  
It's OK between Low or MIN and Full  
or MAX.  
qInspecting Engine Oil Level  
But if it's near or below Low or MIN,  
add enough oil to bring the level to  
Full or MAX.  
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level  
surface.  
2. Warm up the engine to normal  
operating temperature.  
CAUTION  
Don't add engine oil over Full or  
MAX. This may cause engine  
damage.  
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes  
for the oil to return to the oil pan.  
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and  
reinsert it fully.  
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is  
positioned properly before reinserting  
the dipstick.  
Without turbocharger  
The distance between Low or MIN and  
Full or MAX on the dipstick represents  
the following:  
Full  
OK  
Oil capacity  
Low  
L (US qt, Imp qt)  
0.75 (0.79, 0.66)  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Inspect the antifreeze protection and  
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at  
least once a yearat the beginning of the  
winter seasonand before traveling  
where temperatures may drop below  
freezing.  
Engine Coolant  
qInspecting Coolant Level  
WARNING  
Do not use a match or live flame in the  
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD  
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:  
A hot engine is dangerous. If the  
engine has been running, parts of the  
engine compartment can become  
very hot. You could be burned.  
Carefully inspect the engine coolant  
in the coolant reservoir, but do not  
open it.  
Inspect the condition and connections of  
all cooling system and heater hoses.  
Replace any that are swollen or  
deteriorated.  
The coolant should be at full in the  
radiator and between the MAX or F and  
MIN or L marks on the coolant reservoir  
when the engine is cool.  
Without turbocharger  
Turn off the ignition switch and  
make sure the fan is not running before  
attempting to work near the cooling  
fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it  
is running is dangerous. The fan  
could continue running indefinitely  
even if the engine has stopped and  
the engine compartment temperature  
is high. You could be hit by the fan  
and seriously injured.  
With turbocharger  
Do not remove the cooling  
system cap when the engine and  
radiator are hot:  
When the engine and radiator are  
hot, scalding coolant and steam may  
shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury.  
NOTE  
If it's at or near MIN or L, add enough  
coolant to the coolant reservoir to provide  
freezing and corrosion protection and to  
bring the level to MAX or F.  
Changing the coolant should be done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
If the FL22mark is shown on or near the  
cooling system cap, use FL22 type engine  
coolant. If engine coolant other than FL22  
type is used, the engine coolant must be  
replaced earlier than the specified replacement  
interval indicated in the scheduled  
maintenance (page 8-3).  
Ø Radiator coolant will damage  
paint.  
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.  
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)  
water in the coolant mixture.  
Water that contains minerals will  
cut down on the coolant's  
effectiveness.  
Ø Don't add only water. Always add  
a proper coolant mixture.  
Ø The engine has aluminum parts  
and must be protected by an  
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to  
prevent corrosion and freezing.  
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing  
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or  
Silicate.  
These coolants could damage the  
cooling system.  
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new  
coolant is required frequently, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol  
with the coolant. This could  
damage the cooling system.  
Ø Don't use a solution that contains  
more than 60% antifreeze.  
This would reduce effectiveness.  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qAdding Brake/Clutch Fluid  
Brake/Clutch Fluid  
WARNING  
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on  
yourself or on the engine:  
q
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level  
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the  
same reservoir.  
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir  
regularly. It should be kept at MAX.  
The level normally drops with  
accumulated distance, a condition  
associated with wear of brake and clutch  
linings. If it is excessively low, have the  
brake/clutch system inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it  
gets in your eyes, they could be  
seriously injured. If this happens,  
immediately flush your eyes with  
water and get medical attention.  
Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine  
could cause a fire.  
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,  
have the brakes and clutch inspected:  
Low brake/clutch fluid levels are  
dangerous. Low levels could signal  
brake lining wear or a brake system  
leak. Your brakes could fail and  
cause an accident.  
Without turbocharger  
If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it  
reaches MAX.  
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the  
area around the cap.  
CAUTION  
With turbocharger  
Ø Brake and clutch fluid will  
damage painted surfaces. If brake  
or clutch fluid does get on a  
painted surface, wash it off with  
water immediately.  
Ø Using nonspecified brake and  
clutch fluids (page 10-4) will  
damage the systems. Mixing  
different fluids will also damage  
them.  
If the brake/clutch system  
frequently requires new fluid,  
consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The level must be kept between MIN and  
MAX.  
Power Steering Fluid  
qInspecting Power Steering Fluid  
Visually examine the lines and hoses for  
leaks and damage.  
Level  
CAUTION  
If new fluid is required frequently, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
To avoid damage to the power  
steering pump, don't operate the  
vehicle for long periods when the  
power steering fluid level is low.  
NOTE  
Use specified power steering fluid (page 10-4).  
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at  
each engine oil change with the engine off  
and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does  
not require periodic changing.  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
4. While the engine is still idling, pull out  
the dipstick and wipe it clean, and then  
put it back.  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
(ATF)í  
5. Check the ATF level. If there is no ATF  
adhering 5 mm from the end of the  
dipstick, add ATF.  
qInspecting Automatic Transaxle  
Fluid Level  
The automatic transaxle fluid level should  
be inspected regularly. Measure it as  
described below.  
CAUTION  
If there is no ATF adhering to the  
dipstick even after the engine has  
been warmed up, do not drive the  
vehicle. Otherwise, the automatic  
transaxle could be damaged.  
5AT  
CAUTION  
Ø Always check the automatic  
transaxle fluid level according to  
the following procedure. If the  
procedure is not done correctly,  
the automatic transaxle fluid level  
cannot be measured accurately  
which could lead to automatic  
transaxle damage.  
Ø A low fluid level can cause  
transaxle slippage. Overfilling can  
cause foaming, loss of fluid, and  
transaxle malfunction.  
6. Shift the shift lever to each range and  
position, and make sure there is no  
abnormality.  
7. Drive the vehicle on city roads for  
5 km (3.1 mile) or more.  
8. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
9. Shift the shift lever to the park position  
(P), check the ATF level while the  
engine is idling, and make sure that the  
ATF level is within the proper level. If  
the ATF level is not within the proper  
level, add ATF.  
Ø Use only the specified fluid. A non-  
specified fluid could result in  
transaxle malfunction and failure.  
The proper fluid level is marked on the  
dipstick as follows.  
1. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
2. Make sure there is no ATF leakage  
from the ATF hose or the housing.  
Full  
OK  
3. Shift the shift lever to the park position  
(P), start the engine and warm it up.  
Low  
CAUTION  
Do not shift the shift lever while the  
engine is warming up. If the ATF level  
is extremely low, the automatic  
transaxle could be damaged.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-25  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
4AT  
5. Pull it out again.  
The proper fluid level is marked on the  
dipstick as follows.  
The volume of fluid changes with  
temperature. Fluid must be checked while  
idling the engine without driving at  
normal operating temperature.  
Full  
CAUTION  
A
Full  
Ø Low fluid level causes transaxle  
slippage. Overfilling can cause  
foaming, loss of fluid, and  
Low  
B
transaxle malfunction.  
Ø Use specified fluid (page 10-4). A  
nonspecified fluid could result in  
transaxle malfunction and failure.  
Fluid hot scale A  
1. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
When the vehicle has been driven and the  
fluid is at normal operating temperature,  
about 65°C (150°F), the level must be  
between Full and Low.  
2. Start the engine and depress the brake  
pedal.  
3. Move the shift lever through all ranges,  
then set it at P.  
Fluid cold scale B  
When the engine has not been running  
and the outside temperature is about 20°C  
(70°F), the fluid level should be close to,  
but not above, the bottom notch on the  
dipstick.  
WARNING  
Make sure the brake pedal is applied  
before shifting the shift lever:  
Shifting the shift lever without first  
depressing the brake pedal is  
CAUTION  
Ø Use the cold scale only as a  
reference.  
Ø If outside temperature is lower  
than about 20°C (70°F), start the  
engine and inspect the fluid level  
after the engine reaches operating  
temperature.  
dangerous. The vehicle could move  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
4. With the engine still idling, pull out the  
dipstick, wipe it clean, and put it back.  
Ø If the vehicle has been driven for  
an extended period at high speeds  
or in city traffic in hot weather,  
inspect the level only after  
stopping the engine and allowing  
the fluid to cool for 30 minutes.  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Fully insert the dipstick. When adding  
fluid, inspect with the dipstick to make  
sure it doesn't pass full.  
Washer Fluid  
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Inspect the fluid on both sides of the dipstick in  
a well lit area for an accurate reading.  
Use only windshield washer fluid or  
plain water in the reservoir:  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer  
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the  
windshield, it will dirty the  
windshield, affect your visibility, and  
could result in an accident.  
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze  
Protection in Cold Weather:  
Operating your vehicle in  
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40  
degrees F) using washer fluid without  
anti-freeze protection is dangerous  
as it could cause impaired windshield  
vision and result in an accident. In  
cold weather, always use washer  
fluid with anti-freeze protection.  
NOTE  
State or local regulations may restrict the use  
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which  
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in  
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC  
content should be used only if it provides  
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and  
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid  
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.  
Body Lubrication  
All moving points of the body, such as  
door and hood hinges and locks, should  
be lubricated each time the engine oil is  
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on  
locks during cold weather.  
Make sure the hood's secondary latch  
keeps the hood from opening when the  
primary latch is released.  
To inspect the washer fluid level in the  
front reservoir, pull off the cap. Then,  
holding your thumb over the hole in the  
center of the cap, lift it straight up. The  
fluid level can be seen from the fluid  
column in the pipe. Add fluid if necessary.  
Use plain water if washer fluid is  
unavailable. But use only washer fluid in  
cold weather to prevent it from freezing.  
NOTE  
Front and rear washer fluid is supplied from  
the same reservoir.  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
q
Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades  
Wiper Blades  
CAUTION  
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic  
car washers have been known to  
affect the wiper's ability to clean  
windows.  
When the wipers no longer clean well, the  
blades are probably worn or cracked.  
Replace them.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the wiper arms  
and other components, don't try to  
sweep the wiper arm by hand.  
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper  
blades, don't use gasoline,  
kerosene, paint thinner, or other  
solvents on or near them.  
Ø When the wiper lever is in the  
AUTO position and the ignition  
switch is in the ON position, the  
wipers may move automatically in  
the following cases:  
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade  
assembly to expose the plastic locking  
clip.  
Slide the assembly downward; then lift  
it off the arm.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is touched.  
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is wiped with a cloth.  
If the windshield is struck with  
a hand or other object.  
If the rain sensor is struck with  
a hand or other object from  
inside the vehicle.  
Be careful not to pinch hands or  
fingers as it may cause injury, or  
damage the wipers. When  
washing or servicing your Mazda,  
make sure the wiper lever is in the  
OFF position.  
Plastic locking clip  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the windshield  
let the wiper arm down easily, don't  
let it slap down on the windshield.  
Contamination of either the windshield or  
the blades with foreign matter can reduce  
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are  
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments  
used by some commercial car washes.  
If the blades are not wiping properly,  
clean the window and blades with a good  
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse  
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if  
necessary.  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
2. Hold the end of the rubber and pull  
until the tabs are free of the metal  
support.  
CAUTION  
Ø Don't bend or discard the stiffener.  
You need to use them again.  
Ø If the metal stiffeners are  
switched, the blade's wiping  
efficiency could be reduced.  
So don't use the driver's side metal  
stiffener on the passenger's side,  
or vice versa.  
Metal support  
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal  
stiffener in the new blade rubber  
so that the curve is the same as it  
was in the old blade rubber.  
Tab  
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.  
Then install the blade assembly in the  
reverse order of removal.  
3. Remove the metal stiffener from each  
blade rubber and install them in the  
new blade.  
NOTE  
Install the blade so that the tabs are toward the  
bottom of the wiper arm.  
qReplacing Rear Wiper Blade (5  
Door)  
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the  
blade is probably worn or cracked.  
Replace it.  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Remove the metal stiffener from each  
blade rubber and install them in the  
new blade.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the wiper arm  
and other components, don't try to  
sweep the wiper arm by hand.  
1. Raise the wiper arm and rotate the  
wiper blade to the right until it unlocks,  
then remove the blade.  
CAUTION  
Don't bend or discard the stiffener.  
You need to use them again.  
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.  
Then install the blade assembly in the  
reverse order of removal.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the rear  
window let the wiper arm down  
easily, don't let it slap down on the  
rear window.  
2. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it  
out of the blade holder.  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Battery  
WARNING  
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.  
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting  
to ensure safe and correct handling:  
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:  
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID  
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.  
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery  
fluid:  
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.  
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in  
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with  
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.  
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:  
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause  
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.  
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal  
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when  
working near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle  
body:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including  
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.  
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
NOTE  
qInspecting Electrolyte Level  
Remove the battery cover before performing  
battery maintenance.  
A low level of electrolyte fluid will cause  
the battery to discharge quickly.  
Upper level  
Lower level  
Battery cover  
qBattery Maintenance  
Inspect the electrolyte level at least once a  
week. If it's low, remove the caps and add  
enough distilled water to bring the level  
between the upper and lower level  
(illustration).  
Don't overfill.  
Examine the specific gravity of the  
electrolyte with a hydrometer, especially  
during cold weather. If it's low, recharge  
the battery.  
To get the best service from a battery:  
l
Keep it securely mounted.  
Keep the top clean and dry.  
Keep terminals and connections clean,  
l
l
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly  
or terminal grease.  
Rinse off spilled electrolyte  
l
immediately with a solution of water  
and baking soda.  
If the vehicle will not be used for an  
l
extended time, disconnect the battery  
cables.  
8-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí  
does not alleviate the need to check the  
tire condition every day, including  
whether the tires all look inflated properly.  
Inspect all tire pressure monthly  
(including the spare) when the tires are  
cold. Maintain recommended pressures  
for the best ride, handling, and minimum  
tire wear.  
Tires  
For reasons of proper performance, safety,  
and better fuel economy, always maintain  
recommended tire inflation pressures and  
stay within the recommended load limits  
and weight distribution.  
WARNING  
Using Different Tire Types:  
When checking the tire pressures, use of a  
digital tire pressure gauge is  
recommended.  
Driving your vehicle with different  
types of tires is dangerous. It could  
cause poor handling and poor  
braking; leading to loss of control.  
Except for the limited use of the  
temporary spare tire, use only the  
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,  
bias-type) on all four wheels.  
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:  
Using any other tire size than what is  
specified for your Mazda (page 10-8)  
is dangerous. It could seriously affect  
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire  
clearance, and speedometer  
calibration. This could cause you to  
have an accident. Use only tires that  
are the correct size specified for your  
Mazda.  
Refer to the specification charts (page  
10-8).  
qTire Inflation Pressure  
WARNING  
Always inflate the tires to the correct  
pressure:  
Overinflation or underinflation of  
tires is dangerous. Adverse handling  
or unexpected tire failure could result  
in a serious accident.  
Refer to specification charts on page  
10-8.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-35  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
l
l
l
NOTE  
Improper wheel alignment  
Out-of-balance wheel  
Severe braking  
l
Always check tire pressure when tires are  
cold.  
l
Warm tires normally exceed recommended  
pressures. Don't release air from warm tires  
to adjust the pressure.  
Underinflation can cause reduced fuel  
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to  
specification (page 10-8) and inspect the  
lug nuts for tightness.  
l
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,  
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which  
will deform the wheel and cause separation  
of tire from rim.  
CAUTION  
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial  
tires that have an asymmetrical tread  
pattern or studs only from front to  
rear, not from side to side. Tire  
performance will be reduced if  
rotated from side to side.  
l
Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,  
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a  
greater possibility of damage from road  
hazards.  
Keep your tire pressure at the correct  
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,  
have it inspected.  
qReplacing a Tire  
WARNING  
Always use tires that are in good  
condition:  
qTire Rotation  
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if  
irregular wear develops. According to the  
scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.  
During rotation, inspect them for correct  
balance.  
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.  
Reduced braking, steering, and  
traction could result in an accident.  
CAUTION  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System)  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
Forward  
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)  
spare tire in rotation.  
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and  
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused  
by one or a combination of the following:  
l
Incorrect tire pressure  
8-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
NOTE  
qTemporary Spare Tire  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least  
monthly to make sure it's properly inflated  
and stored.  
l
When tires with steel wire reinforcement in  
the sidewalls are used, the system may not  
function correctly even with a genuine  
wheel.  
Refer to System Error Activation on page  
5-31.  
NOTE  
The temporary spare tire condition gradually  
deteriorates even if it has not been used.  
l
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors  
The temporary spare tire is easier to  
whenever tires or wheels are replaced.  
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
handle because of its construction which  
is lighter and smaller than a conventional  
tire. This tire should be used only for an  
emergency and only for a short distance.  
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator  
will appear as a solid band across the  
tread.  
Replace the tire when this happens.  
Use the temporary spare tire only until the  
conventional tire is repaired, which should  
be as soon as possible.  
Tread wear indicator  
Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa (4.2  
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).  
CAUTION  
Ø Do not use your temporary spare  
tire rim with a snow tire or a  
conventional tire. Neither will  
properly fit and could damage  
both tire and rim.  
Ø The temporary spare tire has a  
tread life of less than 5,000 km  
(3,000 miles). The tread life may  
be shorter depending on driving  
conditions.  
Ø The temporary spare tire is for  
limited use, however, if the tread  
wear solid-band indicator  
appears, replace the tire with the  
same type of temporary spare  
(page 8-36).  
New tread  
Worn tread  
You should replace it before the band is  
across the entire tread.  
NOTE  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are  
not being used on the road. It is recommended  
that tires generally be replaced when they are  
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates  
or frequent high loading conditions can  
accelerate the aging process. You should  
replace the spare tire when you replace the  
other road tires due to the aging of the spare  
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit.  
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.  
8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are  
not being used on the road. It is recommended  
that tires generally be replaced when they are  
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates  
or frequent high loading conditions can  
accelerate the aging process. You should  
replace the spare tire when you replace the  
other road tires due to the aging of the spare  
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit.  
Ø A wrong-sized wheel may  
adversely affect:  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Tire fit  
Wheel and bearing life  
Ground clearance  
Snow-chain clearance  
Speedometer calibration  
Headlight aim  
Bumper height  
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System  
Ø
Limited-Slip Differential System  
qReplacing a Wheel  
Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System)  
Ø
WARNING  
Always use wheels of the correct size  
on your vehicle:  
When replacing/repairing the  
tires or wheels or both, have the  
work done by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer, or the tire  
pressure sensors may be  
Using a wrong-sized wheel is  
dangerous. Braking and handling  
could be affected, leading to loss of  
control and an accident.  
damaged.  
Ø
The wheels equipped on your  
Mazda are specially designed  
for installation of the tire  
pressure sensors. Do not use  
non-genuine wheels, otherwise  
it may not be possible to install  
the tire pressure sensors.  
NOTE  
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors  
whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to  
Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
When replacing a wheel, make sure the  
new one is the same as the original factory  
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.  
Proper tire balancing provides the best  
riding comfort and helps reduce tread  
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause  
vibration and uneven wear, such as  
cupping and flat spots.  
8-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Light Bulbs  
4 Door  
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)  
License plate light  
High-mount brake light  
Trunk light  
Headlights (Low beam)  
Headlights  
(High beam)  
Overhead light (Rear)  
Fog lights  
Brake lights/Taillights  
Front turn signal  
lights/Side-marker lights  
Rear turn signal lights  
Reverse lights  
Side turn signal lights  
5 Door  
License plate light  
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)  
High-mount brake light  
Overhead light (Rear)  
Headlights (Low beam)  
Headlights  
Luggage  
(High beam)  
compartment light  
Brake lights/Taillights  
Fog lights  
Rear turn signal lights  
Reverse lights  
Front turn signal lights/Side-  
marker lights  
Side turn signal lights  
Some models.  
8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. When replacing the left headlight bulb,  
turn the cover screws counterclockwise  
and remove them with the cover.  
WARNING  
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself:  
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself is dangerous. Because the  
xenon fusion bulbs require high  
voltage, you could receive an electric  
shock if the bulbs are handled  
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer when the replacement  
is necessary.  
Never touch the glass portion of a  
halogen bulb with your bare hands and  
always wear eye protection when  
handling or working around the bulbs:  
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is  
dangerous. These bulbs contain  
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it  
will explode and serious injuries  
could be caused by the flying glass.  
If the glass portion is touched with  
bare hands, body oil could cause the  
bulb to overheat and explode when  
lit.  
Cover  
4. Find the high and low beam bulbs in  
the rear of the headlight unit.  
The outboard bulb is the LOW beam,  
and the inboard one is the HIGH beam.  
Refer to Light Bulbs on page 8-39.  
(With turbocharger)  
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned  
off and the headlight switch is off.  
2. Lift the hood.  
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the  
reach of children:  
Playing with a halogen bulb is  
dangerous. Serious injuries could be  
caused by dropping a halogen bulb  
or breaking it some other way.  
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs  
Replacing headlight bulbs  
(Without turbocharger)  
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned  
off and the headlight switch is off.  
2. Lift the hood.  
8-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Perform the following procedure when  
replacing the left headlight bulb.  
Remove the clip, grasp the attached  
area of the slide mount and lift it  
upward, and then slide the slide mount  
to a position where it does not interfere  
with the frame.  
4. Remove the strap and raise the air  
filter.  
Strap  
5. Find the high and low beam bulbs in  
the rear of the headlight unit.  
The outboard bulb is the LOW beam,  
and the inboard one is the HIGH beam.  
Refer to Light Bulbs on page 8-39.  
Clip  
High-beam bulb  
Slide mount  
Attached area  
1. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
Carefully remove the headlight bulb  
from its socket in the reflector by  
gently pulling it straight backward out  
of the socket.  
Frame  
2. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical  
connector by pressing the tab on the  
connector with your finger and pulling  
the bulb upward.  
8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
3. Unhook the bulb retaining spring.  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
Low-beam bulb  
4. Swing the retaining spring out and  
away to free the headlight bulb.  
(Xenon fusion bulb)  
You cannot replace the low beam bulbs by  
yourself.  
The bulbs must be replaced at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb  
from the socket by pulling it straight  
back.  
(Halogen bulb)  
6. Replace the bulb.  
1. Detach the electrical connector from  
the bulb by pulling it to the rear.  
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
l
When reinstalling the sealing cover, make  
sure  
faces up.  
2. Pull off the sealing cover.  
8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Replacing a fog light bulbsí  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
1. Turn the screw counterclockwise and  
remove it and then partially peel back  
the mudguard.  
l
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
Front turn signal lights/Side-marker  
lights  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Side turn signal lights  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector  
from the bulb by pressing the tab on  
the connector with your finger and  
pulling the connector downward.  
1. Slide the unit as shown in the figure to  
remove it.  
2. Detach the electrical connector from  
the unit by pulling it to the rear.  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to  
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb  
from its socket in the reflector by  
gently pulling it straight back out of the  
socket.  
3. Install the new side turn signal unit in  
the reverse order of removal.  
NOTE  
Bulb replacement is not possible because it is  
built into the unit. Replace the unit.  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-43  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Brake lights/Taillights (4 Door)  
With LED bulb  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
LED bulb replacement is not possible. The  
rear combination component must be replaced.  
With Non-LED bulb  
1. Pull the center of each plastic retainer  
and remove the retainers and the trunk  
end trim.  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Removal  
Brake lights/Taillights (5 Door)  
With LED bulb  
Installation  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer,  
then remove the retainers, and then  
partially open the trunk side trim.  
NOTE  
LED bulb replacement is not possible. The  
rear combination component must be replaced.  
Removal  
Installation  
8-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
With Non-LED bulb  
1. Remove the cover.  
Left side  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Rear turn signal lights (4 Door)  
1. Pull the center of each plastic retainer,  
and then remove the retainers and the  
trunk end trim.  
Right side  
Removal  
Installation  
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer  
and remove the retainers, and then  
partially open the trunk side trim.  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
Removal  
Installation  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
Right side  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Rear turn signal lights (5 Door)  
1. Remove the cover.  
Left side  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
8-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Reverse lights  
4 Door  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
1. Pull the center section of the plastic  
retainer and remove the retainers, and  
then remove the trunk rear trim.  
Removal  
Installation  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
High-mount brake light  
4 Door  
1. Pull the center of each plastic retainer,  
and then remove the retainers and the  
trunk rear trim.  
Removal  
Installation  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
5 Door  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector  
from the socket.  
1. Remove the cover.  
8-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector  
from the socket.  
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
NOTE  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
5 Door  
With LED bulb  
License plate lights  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft  
cloth to prevent damage to the lens,  
and then remove the lens by carefully  
prying on the edge of the lens with a  
flathead screwdriver.  
With Non-LED bulb  
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim.  
8-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
Trunk light (4 Door)  
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to  
remove it.  
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
Edge  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs  
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)í  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
Luggage compartment light (5 Door)  
Overhead light (Rear)  
1. Insert your finger as shown in the  
figure and remove the unit.  
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with  
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the  
lens, and then remove the lens by  
carefully prying on the edge of the lens  
with the flathead screwdriver.  
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
Edge  
2. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with  
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the  
lens, and then remove the lens by  
carefully prying on the edge of the lens  
with the flathead screwdriver.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-49  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
Fuses  
Your vehicle's electrical system is  
protected by fuses.  
If any lights, accessories, or controls don't  
work, inspect the appropriate circuit  
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside  
element will be melted.  
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using  
that system and consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
qFuse Replacement  
Replacing the fuses on the front  
passenger's side below the glove box  
If the electrical system does not work,  
first inspect the fuses on the front  
passenger's side below the glove box.  
1. Turn off the ignition switch and other  
switches.  
2. Remove the cover.  
8-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Turn the knobs counterclockwise and  
lower the fuse block.  
6. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's  
blown.  
Blown  
Normal  
4. Locate the position of the suspected  
fuse by using the chart inside the fuse  
block cover.  
7. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage  
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it  
does not fit tightly, have an expert  
install it. We recommend an  
5. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse  
puller provided on the inside of the  
engine compartment fuse block cover.  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one  
of the same rating from a circuit not  
essential to vehicle operation, such as  
the MIRROR or CIGAR circuit.  
CAUTION  
Always replace a fuse with one of the  
same rating. Otherwise you may  
damage the electric system.  
Replacing the fuses under the hood  
If the headlights or other electrical  
components do not work and the fuses in  
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse  
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it  
must be replaced. Follow these steps:  
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all  
other switches.  
8-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
2. Remove the fuse block cover.  
WARNING  
Do not replace the main fuse by  
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer perform the replacement:  
Replacing the fuse by yourself is  
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is  
a high current fuse. Incorrect  
replacement could cause an electrical  
shock or a short circuit resulting in a  
fire.  
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is  
blown, replace it with a new one of the  
same amperage rating.  
Main fuse  
Normal  
Blown  
8-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qFuse Panel Description  
Fuse block (Engine compartment)  
36  
29  
28 35  
34  
6
5
4
3
2
18  
17  
10 12 14 16  
11 13 15  
26 27  
23  
22  
20 21 24 30  
33  
32  
9
25  
31  
7
8
19  
1
Without turbocharger  
DESCRIPTION  
FAN  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
Cooling fan  
1
2
40A  
80A  
40A  
40A  
P/ST  
Power steering  
3
BTN  
For protection of various circuits  
4
HEAD  
PTC  
Headlights  
5
6
GLOW/P.SEAT  
30A  
30A  
20A  
30A  
Power seat  
7
ABS 1  
ABS 2  
ABSí, DSCí  
ABSí, DSCí  
For protection of various circuits  
8
9
ENGINE  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
IG KEY 1  
STARTER  
IG KEY 2  
GLOW 1  
HEATER  
GLOW 2  
DEFOG  
30A  
20A  
30A  
Ignition switch  
Starter clutch  
Ignition switch  
40A  
Blower motor  
40A  
Rear window defroster  
íSome models.  
8-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
DESCRIPTION  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
Audio system  
18  
AUDIO  
30A  
(BOSE® Sound System-equipped model)  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
ABS IG  
FOG  
10A  
15A  
15A  
10A  
ABSí, DSCí  
Front fog lightsí  
Horn  
HORN  
DRL  
DRLí  
H/CLEAN  
F/PUMP  
15A  
10A  
10A  
15A  
Fuel pump  
Power steering  
Air conditionerí  
TCMí  
P/ST IG  
A/C MAG  
ALT/TCM  
GLOW SIG  
P.OUTLET  
ENG +B  
15A  
10A  
15A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
Power outlet  
PCM  
ROOM  
Interior lights  
O2 sensorsí  
O2 sensors  
ENG BAR 4  
ENG BAR 3  
EGI INJ  
Injector  
ENG BAR 1  
ENG BAR 2  
For protection of various circuits  
PCM , Fuel pump  
With turbocharger  
DESCRIPTION  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
1
2
FAN  
70A  
Cooling fan  
For protection of various circuits  
Headlights  
3
BTN  
40A  
40A  
30A  
4
HEAD  
F/PUMP  
5
Fuel pump  
6
7
ABS 1  
ABS 2  
ENGINE  
INJECTOR  
IG KEY1  
STARTER  
IG KEY2  
30A  
20A  
30A  
30A  
30A  
20A  
30A  
ABS, DSC  
8
ABS, DSC  
9
For protection of various circuits  
Fuel injector  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Ignition switch  
Starter clutch  
Ignition switch  
HEATER  
40A  
Blower motor  
DEFOG  
40A  
Rear window defroster  
Audio system  
18  
AUDIO  
30A  
(BOSE® Sound System-equipped model)  
8-54  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
DESCRIPTION  
ABS IG  
FOG  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
10A  
15A  
15A  
10A  
ABS  
Front fog lights  
Horn  
HORN  
DRL  
DRLí  
H/CLEAN  
ETC  
10A  
Elec. throttle valve  
Air conditioner  
A/C MAG  
10A  
P.OUTLET  
ENG +B  
ROOM  
15A  
10A  
15A  
Power outlet  
PCM  
Interior lights  
ENG BAR 3  
10A  
O2 sensors  
ENG BAR 1  
ENG BAR 2  
15A  
10A  
For protection of various circuits  
PCM, Fuel pump  
íSome models.  
8-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Fuse block (Passenger's side)  
4142  
37 38 3940  
51 63 64  
58  
43 44 4546 47 48 49 50 525354 55 56 57 5960 6162  
70  
86  
65 66 676869  
7172 737475 76 77 78 79808182 83 84 85  
DESCRIPTION  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
D/LOCK 2  
STOP LAMP/HORN  
HEAD HIGH L  
HEAD HIGH R  
15A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
Double locking systemí  
Stop Lamp, Horn  
Headlight high beam (LH)  
Headlight high beam (RH)  
CIGAR  
15A  
7.5A  
10A  
Lighter  
RADIO  
Audio system  
Power mirrorí  
MIRROR  
Taillight (RH), Parking light (RH), License  
plate lights  
46  
TAIL R  
7.5A  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
OBD  
10A  
For protection of various circuits  
TR/LOCK  
SUN ROOF  
WASHER  
20A  
20A  
Moonroofí  
Windshield wiper and washer  
P/WIND R  
8-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
DESCRIPTION  
P/WIND L  
ALARM  
M/DEF  
FUSE RATING  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
7.5A  
Mirror Defrosterí  
HEAD LOW R  
HEAD LOW L  
15A  
15A  
Headlight low beam (RH), Headlight leveling  
Headlight low beam (LH)  
SAS  
10A  
10A  
20A  
20A  
20A  
10A  
7.5A  
Supplemental restraint system  
METER  
IGNITION  
WIPER  
ENGINE  
IG SIG  
SAS 2  
Instrument cluster, Immobilizer system  
ABSí, DSCí, Power steering  
Windshield wiper and washer  
For protection of various circuits  
Auto wiperí, Power window switchí  
Seat weight sensor  
SEAT WARM  
D/LOCK 1  
A/C  
20A  
25A  
10A  
30A  
30A  
10A  
7.5A  
7.5A  
7.5A  
Seat warmerí  
Power door lockí  
Air conditionerí, Heater control unit  
Power window (LH)í  
Power window (RH)í  
P/WIND L  
P/WIND R  
BACK  
SUN ROOF  
TAIL L  
ILLUMI  
Reverse lights  
Moonroofí  
Taillight (LH), Parking light (LH)  
Illumination  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-57  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
qDamage Caused by Bird  
How to Minimize  
Environmental Paint Damage  
Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap  
Occurrence  
The paintwork on your Mazda represents  
the latest technical developments in  
composition and methods of application.  
Bird droppings contain acids. If these  
aren't removed they can eat away the clear  
and color base coat of the vehicle's  
paintwork.  
Environmental hazards, however, can  
harm the paint's protective properties, if  
proper care is not taken.  
When insects stick to the paint surface  
and decompose, corrosive compounds  
form. These can erode the clear and color  
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if  
they are not removed.  
Here are some examples of possible  
damage, with tips on how to prevent  
them.  
Tree sap will harden and adhere  
qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or  
permanently to the paint finish. If you  
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some  
vehicle paint could come off with it.  
Industrial Fallout  
Occurrence  
Prevention  
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions  
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew  
to form acids. These acids can settle on a  
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,  
the acid becomes concentrated and can  
damage the finish.  
It is necessary to have your Mazda  
washed and waxed to preserve its finish  
according to the instructions in this  
section. This should be done as soon as  
possible.  
And the longer the acid remains on the  
surface, the greater the chance is for  
damage.  
Bird droppings can be removed with a  
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling  
and these are not available, a moistened  
tissue may also take care of the problem.  
The cleaned area should be waxed  
according to the instructions in this  
section.  
Insects and tree sap are best removed with  
a soft sponge and water or a commercially  
available chemical cleaner.  
Prevention  
It is necessary to wash and wax your  
vehicle to preserve its finish according to  
the instructions in this section. These  
steps should be taken immediately after  
you suspect that acid rain has settled on  
your vehicle's finish.  
Another method is to cover the affected  
area with dampened newspaper for one to  
two hours. After removing the newspaper,  
rinse off the loosened debris with water.  
8-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
NOTE  
l
qWater Marks  
The paint chipping zone varies with the  
speed of the vehicle. For example, when  
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint  
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).  
In low temperatures a vehicle's finish  
hardens. This increases the chance of paint  
chipping.  
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on  
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the  
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint  
according to the instructions in this section.  
Failure to repair the affected area could  
lead to serious rusting and expensive  
repairs.  
Occurrence  
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can  
contain harmful minerals such as salt and  
lime. If moisture containing these  
minerals settles on the vehicle and  
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate  
and harden to form white rings. The rings  
can damage your vehicle's finish.  
l
l
Prevention  
It is necessary to wash and wax your  
vehicle to preserve its finish according to  
the instructions in this section. These  
steps should be taken immediately after  
you find water marks on your vehicle's  
finish.  
qPaint Chipping  
Occurrence  
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown  
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits  
your vehicle.  
How to avoid paint chipping  
Keeping a safe distance between you and  
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of  
having your paint chipped by flying  
gravel.  
8-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
Scratches occur on the paint surface  
when:  
Exterior Care  
l
The vehicle is washed without first  
Follow all label and container directions  
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.  
Read all warnings and cautions.  
rinsing off dirt and other foreign  
matter.  
The vehicle is washed with a rough,  
l
dry, or dirty cloth.  
The vehicle is washed at a car wash  
that uses brushes that are dirty or too  
stiff.  
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives  
qMaintaining the Finish  
l
Washing  
l
CAUTION  
are used.  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position and the ignition switch is in  
the ON position, the wipers may  
move automatically in the following  
cases:  
NOTE  
l
Mazda is not responsible for scratches  
caused by automatic car washes or  
improper washing.  
Ø If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is touched.  
l
Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles  
with darker paint finishes.  
Ø If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is wiped with a cloth.  
Ø If the windshield is struck with a  
hand or other object.  
Ø If the rain sensor is struck with a  
hand or other object from inside  
the vehicle.  
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's  
paint finish:  
l
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign  
matter using lukewarm or cold water  
before washing.  
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water  
l
and a soft cloth when washing the  
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.  
Rub gently when washing or drying the  
Be careful not to pinch hands or  
fingers as it may cause injury, or  
damage the wipers. When washing  
or servicing your Mazda, make sure  
the wiper lever is in the OFF position.  
l
vehicle.  
l
Take your vehicle only to a car wash  
that keeps its brushes well maintained.  
Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax  
that contain abrasives.  
To help protect the finish from rust and  
deterioration, wash your Mazda  
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a  
month, with lukewarm or cold water.  
l
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the  
paint surface could be scratched. Here are  
some examples of how scratching could  
occur.  
8-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
Ø Don't use steel wool, abrasive  
cleaners, or strong detergents  
containing highly alkaline or  
caustic agents on chrome-plated  
or anodized aluminum parts. This  
may damage the protective  
coating; also, cleaners and  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
detergents may discolor or  
deteriorate the paint.  
Ø To prevent damaging the antenna,  
remove it before entering a car  
wash facility or passing beneath a  
low overhead clearance.  
Waxing  
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when  
water no longer beads on the finish.  
Always wash and dry the vehicle before  
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,  
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.  
Pay special attention to removing salt,  
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from  
the underside of the fenders, and make  
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of  
the doors and rocker panels are clean.  
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.  
Waxes containing abrasive will remove  
paint and could damage bright metal  
parts.  
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,  
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can  
damage the finish if not removed  
immediately. When prompt washing with  
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap  
made for use on vehicles.  
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for  
metallic, mica, and solid colors.  
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the  
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.  
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with  
lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap  
to dry on the finish.  
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.  
NOTE  
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar  
materials will usually also take off the wax.  
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the  
vehicle doesn't need it.  
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a  
clean chamois to prevent water spots from  
forming.  
8-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
qRepairing Damage to the Finish  
qUnderbody Maintenance  
Deep scratches or chips on the finish  
should be repaired promptly. Exposed  
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major  
repairs.  
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and  
snow removal and solvents used for dust  
control may collect on the underbody. If  
not removed, they will speed up rusting  
and deterioration of such underbody parts  
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust  
system, even though these parts may be  
coated with anti-corrosive material.  
CAUTION  
If your Mazda is damaged and needs  
metal parts repaired or replaced,  
make sure the body shop applies  
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,  
both repaired and new. This will  
prevent them from rusting.  
Thoroughly flush the underbody and  
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold  
water at the end of each winter. Try also  
to do this every month.  
qBright-Metal Maintenance  
Pay special attention to these areas  
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It  
will do more harm than good to wet  
down the road grime without removing  
it.  
l
l
l
Use tar remover to remove road tar and  
insects. Never do this with a knife or  
similar tool.  
To prevent corrosion on bright-metal  
surfaces, apply wax or chrome  
preservative and rub it to a high luster.  
During cold weather or in coastal areas,  
cover bright-metal parts with a coating  
of wax or preservative heavier than  
usual. It would also help to coat them  
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or  
some other protective compound.  
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,  
and frame members have drain holes that  
should not be clogged. Water trapped  
there will cause rusting.  
WARNING  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
CAUTION  
Don't use steel wool, abrasive  
cleaners, or strong detergents  
containing highly alkaline or caustic  
agents on chrome-plated or anodized  
aluminum parts. This may result in  
damage to the protective coating and  
cause discoloration or paint  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
deterioration.  
8-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
qAluminum Wheel Maintenance  
Interior Care  
A protective coating is provided over the  
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed  
to protect this coating.  
qDashboard Precautions  
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume  
and cosmetic oils from contacting the  
dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.  
If these solutions get on the dashboard,  
wipe them off immediately.  
NOTE  
l
Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive  
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on  
aluminum wheels. They may damage the  
coating.  
l
CAUTION  
Do not use glazing agents.  
Glazing agents contain ingredients  
which may cause discoloration,  
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.  
Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent  
and always use a sponge or soft cloth to  
clean the wheels.  
Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold  
water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels  
after driving on dusty or salted roads. This  
helps prevent corrosion.  
Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic  
car wash that uses high-speed or hard  
brushes.  
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax  
the wheels.  
qCleaning the Upholstery and  
l
Interior Trim  
Vinyl  
l
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl  
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.  
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl  
cleaner.  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
Check special requirements for Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System.  
Leatherí  
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
Real leather isn't uniform and may have  
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it  
with a leather cleaner or mild soap.  
Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry  
and buff it with a dry soft cloth.  
Fabric  
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric  
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.  
Clean it with a mild soap solution good  
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh  
spots immediately with a fabric spot  
cleaner.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-63  
 
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
To keep the fabric looking clean and  
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color  
will be affected, it can be stained easily,  
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.  
WARNING  
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
replace damaged seat belts  
immediately:  
Using damaged seat belts is  
dangerous. In a collision, damaged  
belts cannot provide adequate  
protection.  
CAUTION  
Use only recommended cleaners and  
procedures. Others may affect  
appearance and fire-resistance.  
Piano black panelí  
qCleaning the Window Interiors  
The following parts are fitted with panels  
that have been treated with a special  
coating that resists scratching.  
If the windows become covered with an  
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them  
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions  
on the container.  
l
Instrument panel side garnish  
Center panel  
Door switch panel  
Steering wheel (partial)  
l
l
CAUTION  
Don't scrape or scratch the inside of  
the rear window. You may damage  
the rear window defroster grid.  
l
When the panel needs to be cleaned, use a  
soft cloth to wipe off dirt from the surface.  
NOTE  
Scratches or nicks on the panels resulting from  
the use of a hard brush or cloth may not be  
repairable.  
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt  
Webbing  
Clean the webbing with a mild soap  
solution recommended for upholstery or  
carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach  
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.  
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry  
the belt webbing and make sure there is  
no remaining moisture before retracting  
them.  
8-64  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting  
Safety Defects  
9
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 9-2  
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 9-5  
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) .... 9-8  
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ........... 9-9  
Location of the Tire Label  
Tire Maintenance .............................. 9-32  
Limit: ................................................ 9-42  
Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 9-11  
Importer/Distributor .......................... 9-11  
Distributor in Each Area ................... 9-11  
Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 9-43  
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 9-43  
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 9-44  
Service Publications .............................. 9-45  
Service Publications .......................... 9-45  
Country (Except United States and  
Accessories ....................................... 9-17  
Cell Phones ............................................. 9-18  
Cell Phones Warning ......................... 9-18  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System  
(UTQGS) ................................................ 9-21  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System  
(UTQGS) .......................................... 9-21  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle  
in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
NOTE  
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint  
system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a  
certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue.  
l
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,  
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of  
the dealership or the OWNER.  
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary  
l
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in  
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.  
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership  
management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the  
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical  
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda North American  
Operations by one of the following ways.  
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in  
the U.S., can be found here.  
E-mail: click on Contact Uslocated on the Inside Mazdatab, or at the bottom of the  
page at www.mazdaUSA.com  
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following  
information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.  
qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)  
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not  
be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda  
North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program  
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.  
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a  
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to  
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.  
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking  
remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the  
extent permitted by the applicable state Lemon Law, you are also required to resort to  
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the Lemon  
Law. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty  
Act or the applicable state Lemon Law, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO  
LINE.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding  
on you or Mazda else you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO  
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB  
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.  
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope  
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda  
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure  
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Canada)  
qSatisfaction Review Process  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized  
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In  
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your  
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your  
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal  
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:  
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has  
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General  
Manager.  
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office  
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for  
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda  
Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address  
and phone numbers are shown (page 9-7).  
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department  
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda  
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)  
263-4680.  
Provide the Department with the following information:  
1. Your name, address and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the Vehicle Identification Labelspage  
of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.  
4. Purchase date  
5. Present odometer reading  
6. Your dealer's name and location  
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction  
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review  
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of  
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the  
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.  
qMediation/Arbitration Program  
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer  
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still  
not resolved, you have another option.  
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about  
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through  
binding arbitration.  
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.  
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that  
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the  
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.  
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)  
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,  
Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish  
to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling  
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with  
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.  
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the  
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan  
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300  
North York, Ontario  
M2J 4Y8  
http://camvap.ca  
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:  
Province/Territory  
British Columbia & Yukon Territories  
Alberta & Northwest Territories  
Saskatchewan  
CAMVAP Number  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
Manitoba  
Ontario  
Atlantic Canada  
Quebec  
qRegional Offices  
REGIONAL OFFICES  
AREAS COVERED  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
WESTERN REGION  
8171 ACKROYD ROAD  
SUITE 2000  
ALBERTA,  
BRITISH COLUMBIA,  
MANITOBA,  
RICHMOND B.C.  
V6X 3K1  
SASKATCHEWAN,  
YUKON  
(604) 303-5670  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION  
55 VOGELL ROAD,  
ONTARIO  
RICHMOND HILL,  
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5  
(905) 787-7000  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
QUEBEC REGION  
6111 ROUTE TRANS  
CANADIENNE  
QUEBEC,  
NEW BRUNSWICK,  
NOVA SCOTIA,  
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC  
H9R 5A5  
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,  
NEWFOUNDLAND  
(514) 694-6390  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized  
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top  
condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
qSTEP 1  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,  
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL  
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.  
qSTEP 2  
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your  
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).  
Please help us by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Mexico)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle  
in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue.  
l
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,  
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of  
the dealership or the OWNER.  
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary  
l
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in  
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.  
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda Motor de Mexico  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership  
management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the  
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical  
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda Motor de Mexico  
by one of the following ways.  
Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in  
Mexico, can be found here.  
E-mail: click on Contactanosat the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx  
By phone at: 1 (866) 315 0220  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following  
information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Mazda Importer/Distributors  
Importer/Distributor  
Distributor in Each Area  
qU.S.A.  
qCANADA  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.  
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)  
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)  
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada  
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)  
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)  
q
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island  
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto  
Rico)  
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico  
00936-2722  
TEL: (787) 641-9300  
qMEXICO  
Mazda Motor de Mexico  
Circuito Guillermo Gonzalez Camarena N  
1500 Col. Centro de Ciudad Santa Fe.  
01210, Mexico, D.F.  
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:  
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico  
qGUAM  
Triple J Motors  
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,  
GUAM 96911 USA  
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931  
TEL: (671) 649-6555  
qSAIPAN  
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)  
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 234-7524  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Mazda Importer/Distributors  
Triple J Saipan, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)  
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487  
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051  
qAMERICAN SAMOA  
Polynesia Motors, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American  
Samoa 96799  
TEL: (684) 699-9347  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Warranties for Your Mazda  
l
l
l
l
l
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)  
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty  
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty  
Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)  
l
Emission Defect Warranty  
Emission Performance Warranty  
l
l
l
l
l
California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)  
Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)  
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty  
Tire Warranty  
NOTE  
Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Outside the United States  
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific  
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United  
States may differ from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive  
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your  
Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada  
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for  
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).  
NOTE  
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on  
vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United  
States:  
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will  
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be  
l
available.  
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Outside Canada  
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission  
regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ  
from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive  
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your  
Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States  
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the  
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).  
NOTE  
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on  
vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:  
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will  
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be  
l
available.  
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except  
United States and Canada)  
Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific  
emission and safety standards.  
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition  
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another  
country.  
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.  
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be  
unavailable.  
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your  
vehicle.  
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories  
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.  
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda  
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your  
vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you  
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or  
accessories:  
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed  
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety  
systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of  
injuries in an accident.  
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as  
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:  
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an  
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine  
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.  
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the  
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Cell Phones  
Cell Phones Warning  
WARNING  
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication  
equipment in vehicles in your State or Province:  
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle  
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.  
Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of  
these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious  
accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe  
area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-  
free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell  
phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,  
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Immobilizer system  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Keyless entry system  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and  
temperature performance.  
qTread Wear  
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.  
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,  
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service  
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.  
qTraction-AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent  
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on  
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
WARNING  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction  
tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak  
traction characteristics.  
qTemperature-A, B, C  
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions  
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire  
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.  
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent  
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
WARNING  
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:  
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause  
heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several  
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.  
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary  
with respect to grade.  
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND  
TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.  
qUniform Tire Quality Grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  
and maximum section width.  
For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
UTQGS MARK (example)  
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA  
TEMPERATURE A  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tire Labeling  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of  
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire  
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of  
a recall.  
qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires  
Please refer to the diagram below.  
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number  
2. Passenger car tire  
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters  
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)  
5. Radial  
6. Rim diameter code  
7. Load index & speed symbol  
8. Severe snow conditions  
9. Tire ply composition and materials used  
10. Max. load rating  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades  
12. Max. permissible inflation pressure  
13. SAFETY WARNING  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation  
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and  
load index rating may be different from the example.  
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).  
NOTE  
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).  
215  
215is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the  
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger  
the number, the wider the tire.  
65  
65is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.  
R
Ris the tire construction symbol. R indicates Radial ply construction.  
15  
15is the wheel rim diameter in inches.  
95  
95is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each  
tire can support.  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
H
His the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of  
the tire is rated.  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
99 mph  
Q
R
S
106 mph  
112 mph  
118 mph  
124 mph  
130 mph  
149 mph  
168* mph  
186* mph  
T
U
H
V
W
Y
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For  
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow  
AT: All Terrain.  
AS: All Season. The M+Sor M/Sindicates that the tire has some functional use in  
mud and snow.  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
This begins with the letters DOTwhich indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The  
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four  
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers  
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,  
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes  
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire  
defect requires a recall.  
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used  
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In  
general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire  
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,  
and other.  
Maximum Load Rating  
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by  
the tire.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure  
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under  
normal driving conditions.  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades  
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions  
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have  
poor traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's  
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
Snow Tires  
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very  
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.  
Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other  
tires on your vehicle.  
SAFETY WARNING  
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.  
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:  
l
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-  
MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)  
TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT  
TIRES.  
l
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-  
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY  
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qInformation on Temporary Tires  
Please refer to the diagram below.  
1. Temporary tires  
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters  
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)  
4. Diagonal  
5. Rim diameter code  
6. Load index&speed symbol  
T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation  
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and  
load index rating may be different from the example.  
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).  
115  
115is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the  
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger  
the number, the wider the tire.  
9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
70  
70is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.  
D
Dis the tire construction symbol. D indicates diagonal ply construction.  
16  
16is the wheel rim diameter in inches.  
90  
90is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each  
tire can support.  
M
Mis the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of  
the tire is rated.  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
M
81 mph  
9-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)  
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important  
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.  
SAMPLE  
qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure  
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi  
for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the  
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.  
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is  
maintained.  
Refer to Tires on page 10-8.  
NOTE  
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold  
tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least  
3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.  
9-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
WARNING  
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the  
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the  
information in this owner's manual:  
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.  
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may  
result in severe cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of  
vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing  
and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It  
results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire  
can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!  
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking  
at them.  
qChecking Tire Pressure  
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold meaning they are not  
hot from driving even a mile.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.  
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.  
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.  
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the  
valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
6. Replace the valve cap.  
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.  
NOTE  
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.  
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that  
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.  
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other  
irregularities.  
NOTE  
Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the  
pressure.  
Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.  
Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.  
9-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qGlossary of Terms  
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and  
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing  
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of  
manufacture.  
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.  
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.  
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.  
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and  
cargo.  
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's  
mounted on the vehicle.  
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity  
is described on the tire label.  
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production  
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,  
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy  
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.  
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire  
beads are seated.  
9-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tire Maintenance  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are  
some important maintenance points:  
qTire Inflation Pressure  
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain  
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the  
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.  
qTire Rotation  
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular  
wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.  
Forward  
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a  
combination of the following:  
l
Incorrect tire pressure  
Improper wheel alignment  
Out-of-balance wheel  
Severe braking  
l
l
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 10-8) and inspect the lug nuts  
for tightness.  
9-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
CAUTION  
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern  
or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be  
weakened if rotated from side to side.  
(With limited-slip differential)  
Don't use the following:  
Ø Tires not of the designated size  
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at the same time  
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated  
If these instructions aren't followed, the rotation of the left and right wheels will be  
different and will thus apply a constant load on the limited-slip differential.  
This will cause a malfunction.  
qReplacing a Tire  
WARNING  
Always use tires that are in good condition:  
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could  
result in an accident.  
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace  
the tire when this happens.  
Tread wear indicator  
New tread  
Worn tread  
You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.  
NOTE  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires  
generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high  
loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you  
replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.  
9-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qSafety Practices  
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate  
good driving habits for your own benefit.  
l
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking  
l
l
l
CAUTION  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your  
tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution  
until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire  
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with  
your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest  
vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
9-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Vehicle Loading  
WARNING  
Do not taw a trailer with this vehicle:  
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to  
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle  
damage.  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep  
your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.  
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.  
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining  
your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Safety  
Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:  
WARNING  
Overloaded Vehicle:  
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious  
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's  
suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,  
handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.  
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the  
distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail  
completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a  
combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation  
pressure.  
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the  
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.  
9-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all  
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your  
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.  
PAYLOAD  
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to  
carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load  
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for THE  
COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER  
EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbsfor your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire  
label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any  
aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of  
the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be  
accurate.  
9-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
SAMPLE  
CARGO  
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and  
optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of  
cargo weight.  
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo  
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from  
the combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceedvalue on the tire  
label.  
9-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg  
(849 lbs) for the combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed:  
_
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg  
(699 lbs)  
_
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)  
lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)  
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -  
including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried  
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on  
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
GVW  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully  
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is  
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door  
frame or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.  
9-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
SAMPLE  
WARNING  
Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:  
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and  
could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,  
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the  
vehicle, or loss of control.  
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.  
Do not taw a trailer with this vehicle:  
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to  
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle  
damage.  
9-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
GCW  
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW) plus the  
weight of the fully loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the  
vehicle and the loaded trailer - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can  
handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle's braking system is rated  
for operation at GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe  
control of towed vehicles and for trailers weighing more than 1,500 lbs). The GCW must  
never exceed the GCWR.  
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer  
the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options, no cargo (internal or  
_
_
external), a tongue load of 10 15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15 25%  
(fifth-wheel trailer), and driver only (150 lbs). Consult your dealership (or the RV and  
Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for more detailed information.  
Tongue Load or Fifth-Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a  
trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.  
Examples: For a 5000 lb conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a  
proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lbs. For an 11,500 lb fifth-wheel trailer, multiply by  
0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875 lbs.  
9-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
WARNING  
Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:  
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.  
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or  
damage to the vehicle.  
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals  
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement  
tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR  
limitations.  
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.  
9-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:  
(1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbson your vehicle's placard.  
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be  
riding in your vehicle.  
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg  
or XXX lbs.  
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load  
capacity. For example, if the XXXamount equals 1400 lbs. and there  
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available  
_
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650  
lbs.)  
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the  
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this  
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
9-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could  
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor  
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it  
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and  
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual  
problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda  
Importer/Distributor).  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You  
can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://  
www.safercar.gov.  
NOTE  
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, California 92618-2922  
or  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500  
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-11) in  
this booklet.  
9-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)  
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect  
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact  
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330  
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.  
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:  
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm  
9-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Service Publications  
Service Publications  
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do  
some of their own maintenance and repair.  
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the  
chart below.  
If they don't have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.  
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER  
9999-95-017B-09  
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION  
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)  
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)  
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)  
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
9999-MX-017B-09  
9999-95-019G-09  
9999-MX-019G-09  
9999-95-038C-09 (U.S.A. only)  
9999-EC-038C-09 (Canada only)  
9999-PR-038C-09 (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)  
9999-95-MODL-09  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS  
9999-95-011F-08NAV (U.S.A. only) (U.S.A. only)  
9999-EC-011F-08NAV (Canada only) (Canada only)  
2009 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL  
qWORKSHOP MANUAL:  
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and  
chassis.  
qWIRING DIAGRAM:  
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical  
system.  
qOWNER'S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.  
This is not a technician's manual.  
qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:  
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.  
9-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Service Publications  
qNAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation  
system. This is not a technician's manual.  
9-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
10  
Specifications ............................................................................... 10-4  
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-4  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Identification Numbers  
qChassis Number  
Vehicle Information Labels  
qVehicle Identification Number  
The vehicle identification number legally  
identifies your vehicle. The number is on  
a plate attached to the cowl panel located  
on the left corner of the dashboard. This  
plate can easily be seen through the  
windshield.  
qVehicle Emission Control  
Information Label  
Without turbocharger  
q
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label  
With turbocharger  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Identification Numbers  
qTire Pressure Label  
qEngine Number  
Without turbocharger  
Forward  
With turbocharger  
Forward  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
qEngine  
Specification  
Without turbocharger  
Item  
With turbocharger  
2.0-liter engine  
2.3-liter engine  
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder  
Type  
87.5 × 83.1 mm  
(3.44 × 3.27 in)  
Bore×Stroke  
87.5 × 94.0 mm (3.44 × 3.70 in)  
1,999 ml  
(1,999 cc, 122.0 cu in)  
Displacement  
2,261 ml (2,261 cc, 137.9 cu in)  
9.7 9.5  
Compression ratio  
10.0  
qElectrical System  
Item  
Classification  
2.0-liter engine  
2.3-liter engine  
12V-40AH/5HR, 12V-52AH/5HR  
Without  
turbocharger  
12V-40AH/5HR, 12V-52AH/5HR,  
12V-55AH/5HR  
Battery  
With turbocharger  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
12V-48AH/5HR, 12V-55AH/5HR  
LFG1 18 110*1, L3Y2 18 110  
L3K9 18 110A*1, L3Y3 18 110  
1.251.35 mm (0.0500.053 in)  
0.700.80 mm (0.0280.031 in)  
Spark-plug number  
Spark-plug gap  
*1 ex factory  
NOTE  
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium  
alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.  
qLubricant Quality  
Lubricant  
Classification  
Engine  
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 8-18.  
API Service  
SAE  
GL-4 or GL-5  
75W-90  
Any temperature  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
API Service  
SAE  
GL-4 or GL-5  
80W-90  
Manual transaxle oil  
Above 10°C (50°F)  
API Service  
SAE  
GL-4  
75W-90  
Automatic transaxle fluid  
Power steering fluid  
Brake/Clutch fluid  
ATF M-V  
ATF M-III or equivalent (e.g. Dexron® II)  
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
qCapacities  
(Approximate Quantities)  
Item  
Capacity  
With oil filter  
replacement  
4.3 L (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)  
Without turbocharger  
Without oil filter  
replacement  
3.9 L (4.1 US qt, 3.4 Imp qt)  
5.7 L (6.0 US qt, 5.0 Imp qt)  
5.3 L (5.6 US qt, 4.7 Imp qt)  
Engine oil  
With oil filter  
replacement  
With turbocharger  
Without oil filter  
replacement  
Coolant  
7.5 L (7.9 US qt, 6.6 Imp qt)  
2.87 L (3.03 US qt, 2.53 Imp qt)  
2.5 L (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)  
7.2 L (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt)  
8.14 L (8.60 US qt, 7.16 Imp qt)  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
4-speed transaxle  
5-speed transaxle  
Manual transaxle oil  
Automatic transaxle fluid  
Fuel tank  
55.0 L  
(14.5 US gal, 12.1 Imp gal)  
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.  
qDimensions  
Model  
Item  
4 Door  
4,505 mm (177.4 in)  
5 Door  
STANDARD TYPE  
SPORTY TYPE  
Without  
turbocharger  
Overall length  
Overall width  
4,510 mm (177.6 in) 4,490 mm (176.8 in)  
With turbocharger  
4,490 mm (176.8 in)  
1,745 mm (68.7 in)  
1,755 mm (69.1 in)  
1,765 mm (69.5 in)  
1,465 mm (57.7 in)  
1,530 mm (60.2 in)  
1,535 mm (60.4 in)  
1,515 mm (59.6 in)  
1,525 mm (60.0 in)  
Without side molding  
With side molding  
1,745 mm (68.7 in)  
1,755 mm (69.1 in)  
Without  
turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
Overall height  
Front tread  
1,465 mm (57.7 in)  
1,530 mm (60.2 in)  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
Without turbocharger  
With turbocharger  
1,515 mm (59.6 in)  
Rear tread  
Wheelbase  
2,640 mm (103.9 in) 2,640 mm (103.9 in)  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
qWeights  
4 Door  
2.0-liter engine  
Weight  
Weight  
Item  
Manual transaxle  
1,719 kg (3,790 lbs)  
919 kg (2,026 lbs)  
800 kg (1,764 lbs)  
Automatic transaxle  
1,733 kg (3,821 lbs)  
983 kg (2,068 lbs)  
795 kg (1,753 lbs)  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Front  
Rear  
2.3-liter engine  
Item  
Manual transaxle  
1,764 kg (3,889 lbs)  
952 kg (2,099 lbs)  
812 kg (1,790 lbs)  
Automatic transaxle  
1,792 kg (3,951 lbs)  
981 kg (2,163 lbs)  
811 kg (1,788 lbs)  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Front  
Rear  
5 Door  
Without turbocharger  
Weight  
Weight  
Item  
Manual transaxle  
1,783 kg (3,931 lbs)  
954 kg (2,103 lbs)  
829 kg (1,828 lbs)  
Automatic transaxle  
1,811 kg (3,993 lbs)  
983 kg (2,167 lbs)  
828 kg (1,825 lbs)  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Front  
Rear  
With turbocharger  
Item  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
1,866 kg (4,114 lbs)  
1,055 kg (2,326 lbs)  
811 kg (1,788 lbs)  
Front  
Rear  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
qAir Conditioner  
Item  
Classification  
Refrigerant Type  
HFC134a (R-134a)  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
qLight Bulbs  
Exterior light  
Category  
Light bulb  
High beam  
Low beam  
Wattage  
60  
ECE R (SAE)  
HB3 (HB3)  
H7 (H7)  
Headlights  
Halogen  
55  
Xenon fusion  
35  
D2S (D2S)  
(#1157NA)  
H11 (H11)  
Front turn signal lights/Side-marker lights  
Fog lightsí  
27/8  
55  
Type A  
Type B  
51  
HB4 (HB4)  
WY5W ()  
W16W (#921)  
W16W (#921)  
()  
Side turn signal lights*1  
4 Door  
5
18  
High-mount brake light  
5 Door  
Bulb type  
LED type  
18  
LED*2  
Rear turn signal lights  
21  
WY21W ()  
W21/5W (#7443)  
()  
Bulb type  
Brake lights/Taillights  
LED type  
21/5  
LED*2  
21  
Reverse lights  
W21W (#7440)  
W5W ()  
License plate light  
5
*1 Bulb replacement is not possible because it is built into the unit. Replace the unit.  
*2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.  
Fog lights  
Type A  
Type B  
Interior light  
Category  
Light bulb  
Wattage  
ECE R  
W5W  
Trunk light (4 Door)  
Luggage compartment light (5 Door)  
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)í  
Overhead light (Rear)  
5
W5W  
10  
Vanity mirror lightsí  
1.2  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-7  
 
Specifications  
qTires  
NOTE  
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.  
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted to  
your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.  
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 8-35.  
Standard tire  
Inflation pressure  
Tire size  
Front  
Rear  
P195/65R15 89H  
P205/55R16 89H  
P205/50R17 88V  
215/45R18 93Y  
230 kPa (34 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
230 kPa (34 psi)  
230 kPa (34 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
Temporary spare tire  
Tire size  
Inflation pressure  
420 kPa (60 psi)  
T115/70D15 90M  
T125/70D16 96M  
T125/70D17 98M  
qFuses  
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-50.  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
11  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
A
Accessory Socket .............................. 6-76  
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and  
Before Starting the Engine .................. 4-6  
After getting in ............................. 4-6  
Before getting in .......................... 4-6  
Bottle Holder ..................................... 6-72  
Brake/Clutch  
Accessories ....................................... 9-17  
Air Bag Systems ............................... 2-42  
Ambient Temperature Display .......... 6-66  
Warning light ............................... 5-8  
Appearance Care ............................... 8-58  
Ashtray .............................................. 6-70  
Audio System ................................... 6-16  
Audio control switch .................. 6-56  
Audio set .................................... 6-27  
AUX mode ................................. 6-58  
Operating tips for audio  
Fluid ........................................... 8-23  
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-7  
Brakes assist ................................. 5-9  
Foot brake .................................... 5-5  
Parking brake ............................... 5-6  
Warning light ............................... 5-7  
Break-In Period ................................... 4-7  
Bulb Replacement ............................. 8-39  
system ........................................ 6-17  
Safety certification ..................... 6-61  
Automatic Transaxle  
Driving tips ................................ 5-18  
Fluid ........................................... 8-25  
Manual shift mode ..................... 5-14  
Shift-lock override ..................... 5-14  
Shift-lock system ....................... 5-14  
Transaxle ranges ........................ 5-13  
Capacities .......................................... 10-5  
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 4-5  
Cargo Securing Loops ...................... 6-73  
Cargo Sub-Compartment .................. 6-73  
Catalytic Converter ............................. 4-4  
Cell Phones ....................................... 9-18  
Center Console.................................. 6-73  
Child Restraint  
B
Child restraint precautions ......... 2-27  
Installing child-restraint  
Battery  
Emergency starting .................... 7-16  
Maintenance ............................... 8-32  
Specifications ............................. 10-4  
Beep Sounds  
Ignition key reminder ................. 5-50  
Lights-on reminder ..................... 5-50  
Tire inflation pressure warning  
beep ............................................ 5-50  
Beeps  
systems ....................................... 2-31  
LATCH child-restraint  
systems ....................................... 2-37  
Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ... 3-11  
Cigarette Lighter ............................... 6-70  
Climate Control System ...................... 6-2  
Gas specifications ...................... 10-6  
Clock ................................................. 6-66  
Cruise Control ................................... 5-20  
Cup Holder ........................................ 6-71  
Seat belt warning beep Sounds... 5-50  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
C
E
Customer Assistance ........................... 9-2  
Engine  
Coolant ....................................... 8-21  
Exhaust gas .................................. 4-5  
Oil .............................................. 8-18  
Overheating ................................ 7-14  
Starting ......................................... 5-4  
Engine Compartment Overview ........ 8-17  
Engine Coolant  
Overheating ................................ 7-14  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Gauge ................................................ 5-35  
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 4-5  
Exterior Care ..................................... 8-60  
D
Dashboard Illumination .................... 5-36  
Daytime Running Lights ................... 5-54  
Defroster  
Mirror ......................................... 5-60  
Rear window .............................. 5-60  
Dimensions ....................................... 10-5  
Door Locks ......................................... 3-8  
Driving In Flooded Area ................... 4-11  
Driving on Uneven Road .................. 4-13  
Driving Tips ........................................ 4-7  
Driving in flooded area .............. 4-11  
Driving on uneven road ............. 4-13  
Hazardous driving ........................ 4-8  
Money-saving suggestions ........... 4-7  
Rocking the vehicle ...................... 4-9  
Turbocharged vehicles ............... 4-14  
Winter driving ............................ 4-10  
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 5-24  
DSC OFF indicator light ............ 5-25  
DSC OFF switch ........................ 5-25  
TCS/DSC Indicator light ............ 5-25  
Flasher  
Hazard warning .......................... 5-61  
Headlights .................................. 5-51  
Flat Tire ............................................... 7-3  
Changing ...................................... 7-8  
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3  
Flexible Floor Board ......................... 6-74  
Fluids  
Classification .............................. 10-4  
Owner maintenance ................... 8-15  
Fog Lights ......................................... 5-55  
Foot Brake .......................................... 5-5  
Front Seats  
E
Emergency Starting ........................... 7-16  
Flooded engine ........................... 7-16  
Jump-starting .............................. 7-17  
Push-starting .............................. 7-20  
Emergency Towing ........................... 7-21  
Emission Control System .................... 4-4  
(Electrically Operated Seats) ............... 2-4  
Front Seats  
(Manually Operated Seats) ................. 2-2  
Fuel  
Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-20  
Gauge ......................................... 5-36  
Requirements ............................... 4-2  
Tank capacity ............................. 10-5  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
F
Fuses ................................................. 8-50  
Panel description ........................ 8-53  
Replacement ............................... 8-50  
Information Display .......................... 6-65  
Ambient temperature display ..... 6-66  
Audio display ............................. 6-67  
Clock .......................................... 6-66  
Information display functions .... 6-65  
Trip computer ............................. 6-67  
Inside Trunk Release Lever ............... 3-17  
Instrument Cluster ............................. 5-33  
Instrument Cluster Dimmer Select  
G
H
Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 5-61  
Hazardous Driving .............................. 4-8  
Headlights  
Button ............................................... 5-36  
Interior Care ...................................... 8-63  
Interior Lights ................................... 6-62  
Control ....................................... 5-51  
Flashing ...................................... 5-53  
High-low beam .......................... 5-53  
Leveling ..................................... 5-53  
On reminder ............................... 5-53  
Hood Release .................................... 3-22  
Horn .................................................. 5-61  
Jump-Starting .................................... 7-17  
K
Keyless Entry System ......................... 3-3  
Keys .................................................... 3-2  
I
Ignition  
Keys ............................................. 3-2  
Switch .......................................... 5-2  
Illuminated Entry System ................. 6-62  
Immobilizer System .......................... 3-26  
Indicator Lights ................................. 5-38  
Cruise ......................................... 5-48  
DSC OFF .................................... 5-48  
Headlight high-beam .................. 5-47  
Power steering malfunction ........ 5-49  
Security ...................................... 5-47  
Shift position .............................. 5-47  
TCS/DSC ................................... 5-48  
Turn-signal/hazard warning ....... 5-49  
Label Information ............................. 10-2  
Lane-Change Signals ........................ 5-54  
Liftgate .............................................. 3-11  
Luggage compartment ............... 3-13  
Light Bulbs  
Replacement ............................... 8-39  
Specifications ............................. 10-7  
Lighter ............................................... 6-70  
Lighting Control ............................... 5-51  
Lubricant Quality .............................. 10-4  
Luggage Compartment Light ............ 6-63  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M
Maintenance  
Rear Door Child Safety Locks .......... 3-11  
Rear Seat ............................................. 2-7  
Rear Window Defroster .................... 5-60  
Rear Window Washer ....................... 5-59  
Rear Window Wiper.......................... 5-59  
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign  
Country ............................................. 9-16  
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 4-9  
Introduction .................................. 8-2  
Owner maintenance  
precautions ................................. 8-16  
Owner maintenance schedule ..... 8-15  
Recommendations for shifting.... 5-10  
Map Lights ........................................ 6-63  
Mirror Defroster ................................ 5-60  
Mirrors  
Outside mirrors .......................... 3-30  
Rearview mirror ......................... 3-31  
Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 4-7  
Moonroof .......................................... 3-24  
Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 9-43  
Seat Belt System  
Automatic locking ...................... 2-16  
Emergency locking .................... 2-15  
Except center-rear position ......... 2-17  
Extender ..................................... 2-24  
Pregnant women ........................ 2-15  
Pretensioner and load limiting.... 2-19  
Seat belt precautions .................. 2-13  
Warning light/beep ..................... 2-25  
Seats  
O
Odometer and Trip Meter .................. 5-34  
Outside Mirrors ................................. 3-30  
Overhead Lights ................................ 6-63  
Overheating....................................... 7-14  
Overloading ...................................... 4-12  
P
Paint Damage .................................... 8-58  
Parking Brake ..................................... 5-6  
Power Steering .................................. 5-19  
Fluid ........................................... 8-24  
Power steering malfunction indicator  
Front seat  
(Electrically operated seats) ......... 2-4  
Front seat  
(Manually operated seats) ............ 2-2  
Rear seat ....................................... 2-7  
Seat warmer ................................ 2-11  
Security System  
light ............................................ 5-19  
Power Windows ................................ 3-18  
Push-Starting ..................................... 7-20  
Immobilizer system .................... 3-26  
Theft-deterrent system ............... 3-28  
Service Publications .......................... 9-45  
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ................ 7-3  
Specifications .................................... 10-4  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
S
T
Speedometer ...................................... 5-34  
SRS Air Bags  
Tires  
Flat Tire ........................................ 7-3  
How the Air Bags Work ............. 2-48  
Inflation pressure ........................ 8-35  
Rotation ...................................... 8-36  
Snow tires .................................. 4-10  
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3  
Specifications ............................. 10-8  
Tire chains .................................. 4-11  
Uniform tire quality grading system  
(UTQGS) ................................... 9-21  
Tool ..................................................... 7-3  
Towing  
Description ................................. 7-21  
Emergency towing ..................... 7-21  
Recreational towing ................... 7-23  
Trailer towing ............................. 4-15  
Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 5-23  
TCS/DSC indicator light ............ 5-24  
Trailer Towing .................................. 4-15  
Trip Meter ......................................... 5-34  
Trunk Lid .......................................... 3-14  
Inside trunk release lever ............ 3-17  
Trunk Light ....................................... 3-16  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 5-54  
precautions ................................. 2-42  
Starting the Engine.............................. 5-4  
Steering Wheel .................................. 3-30  
Horn ........................................... 5-61  
Storage Compartments ...................... 6-72  
Cargo securing loops .................. 6-73  
Cargo sub-compartment ............. 6-73  
Center console ............................ 6-73  
Flexible Floor Board .................. 6-74  
Glove box ................................... 6-72  
Sunshade ........................................... 3-25  
T
Tachometer ........................................ 5-35  
Temporary Spare Tire ....................... 8-37  
Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 3-28  
Tiedown  
Hook .......................................... 7-22  
Tire Information ................................ 9-23  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 5-27  
System error activation .............. 5-31  
Tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light .............................. 5-29  
Tires and wheels ......................... 5-31  
Vanity Mirrors ................................... 6-62  
Vehicle Information Labels ............... 10-2  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
W
Warning Lights ................................. 5-38  
ABS ............................................ 5-40  
Air bag system ........................... 5-42  
Automatic transaxle ................... 5-45  
Brake system .............................. 5-40  
Door-ajar .................................... 5-44  
Engine oil pressure ..................... 5-41  
Front seat belt pretensioner  
system ........................................ 5-42  
Low fuel ..................................... 5-43  
Low washer fluid level ............... 5-44  
Seat belt ...................................... 5-43  
Tire pressure monitoring  
system ........................................ 5-45  
Warranty ............................................ 9-13  
Washer Fluid ..................................... 8-27  
Weights ............................................. 10-6  
Wheel Replacement .......................... 8-38  
Windows  
Power windows .......................... 3-18  
Windshield Washer ........................... 5-59  
Windshield Wipers ............................ 5-56  
Blades replacement .................... 8-29  
Winter Driving .................................. 4-10  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kuppersbusch USA Cooktop GMS 9551 User Manual
LG Electronics Computer Monitor E1910S User Manual
LG Electronics Washer WM2487HRMA User Manual
Locke Lawn Mower MP 3132 FP 3132 User Manual
Magnavox Flat Panel Television 15MF User Manual
Makita Cordless Saw 5092D User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Refrigerator 11M User Manual
Maytag Washer BRAVOSTM User Manual
Maytag Washer MAV6057AWW User Manual
Metra Electronics Radio 95 7321 User Manual